* Check in merge from gcc2. See ChangeLog.11 and ChangeLog.12
[gcc.git] / gcc / tm.texi
1 @c Copyright (C) 1988,89,92,93,94,96,97,1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
2 @c This is part of the GCC manual.
3 @c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
4
5 @node Target Macros
6 @chapter Target Description Macros
7 @cindex machine description macros
8 @cindex target description macros
9 @cindex macros, target description
10 @cindex @file{tm.h} macros
11
12 In addition to the file @file{@var{machine}.md}, a machine description
13 includes a C header file conventionally given the name
14 @file{@var{machine}.h}. This header file defines numerous macros
15 that convey the information about the target machine that does not fit
16 into the scheme of the @file{.md} file. The file @file{tm.h} should be
17 a link to @file{@var{machine}.h}. The header file @file{config.h}
18 includes @file{tm.h} and most compiler source files include
19 @file{config.h}.
20
21 @menu
22 * Driver:: Controlling how the driver runs the compilation passes.
23 * Run-time Target:: Defining @samp{-m} options like @samp{-m68000} and @samp{-m68020}.
24 * Storage Layout:: Defining sizes and alignments of data.
25 * Type Layout:: Defining sizes and properties of basic user data types.
26 * Registers:: Naming and describing the hardware registers.
27 * Register Classes:: Defining the classes of hardware registers.
28 * Stack and Calling:: Defining which way the stack grows and by how much.
29 * Varargs:: Defining the varargs macros.
30 * Trampolines:: Code set up at run time to enter a nested function.
31 * Library Calls:: Controlling how library routines are implicitly called.
32 * Addressing Modes:: Defining addressing modes valid for memory operands.
33 * Condition Code:: Defining how insns update the condition code.
34 * Costs:: Defining relative costs of different operations.
35 * Sections:: Dividing storage into text, data, and other sections.
36 * PIC:: Macros for position independent code.
37 * Assembler Format:: Defining how to write insns and pseudo-ops to output.
38 * Debugging Info:: Defining the format of debugging output.
39 * Cross-compilation:: Handling floating point for cross-compilers.
40 * Misc:: Everything else.
41 @end menu
42
43 @node Driver
44 @section Controlling the Compilation Driver, @file{gcc}
45 @cindex driver
46 @cindex controlling the compilation driver
47
48 @c prevent bad page break with this line
49 You can control the compilation driver.
50
51 @table @code
52 @findex SWITCH_TAKES_ARG
53 @item SWITCH_TAKES_ARG (@var{char})
54 A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{char}}
55 takes arguments. The value should be the number of arguments that
56 option takes--zero, for many options.
57
58 By default, this macro is defined as
59 @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG}, which handles the standard options
60 properly. You need not define @code{SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} unless you
61 wish to add additional options which take arguments. Any redefinition
62 should call @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} and then check for
63 additional options.
64
65 @findex WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG
66 @item WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG (@var{name})
67 A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{name}}
68 takes arguments. The value should be the number of arguments that
69 option takes--zero, for many options. This macro rather than
70 @code{SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} is used for multi-character option names.
71
72 By default, this macro is defined as
73 @code{DEFAULT_WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG}, which handles the standard options
74 properly. You need not define @code{WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} unless you
75 wish to add additional options which take arguments. Any redefinition
76 should call @code{DEFAULT_WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} and then check for
77 additional options.
78
79 @findex SWITCHES_NEED_SPACES
80 @item SWITCHES_NEED_SPACES
81 A string-valued C expression which enumerates the options for which
82 the linker needs a space between the option and its argument.
83
84 If this macro is not defined, the default value is @code{""}.
85
86 @findex CPP_SPEC
87 @item CPP_SPEC
88 A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program options to
89 pass to CPP. It can also specify how to translate options you
90 give to GNU CC into options for GNU CC to pass to the CPP.
91
92 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
93
94 @findex NO_BUILTIN_SIZE_TYPE
95 @item NO_BUILTIN_SIZE_TYPE
96 If this macro is defined, the preprocessor will not define the builtin macro
97 @code{__SIZE_TYPE__}. The macro @code{__SIZE_TYPE__} must then be defined
98 by @code{CPP_SPEC} instead.
99
100 This should be defined if @code{SIZE_TYPE} depends on target dependent flags
101 which are not accessible to the preprocessor. Otherwise, it should not
102 be defined.
103
104 @findex NO_BUILTIN_PTRDIFF_TYPE
105 @item NO_BUILTIN_PTRDIFF_TYPE
106 If this macro is defined, the preprocessor will not define the builtin macro
107 @code{__PTRDIFF_TYPE__}. The macro @code{__PTRDIFF_TYPE__} must then be
108 defined by @code{CPP_SPEC} instead.
109
110 This should be defined if @code{PTRDIFF_TYPE} depends on target dependent flags
111 which are not accessible to the preprocessor. Otherwise, it should not
112 be defined.
113
114 @findex SIGNED_CHAR_SPEC
115 @item SIGNED_CHAR_SPEC
116 A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program options to
117 pass to CPP. By default, this macro is defined to pass the option
118 @samp{-D__CHAR_UNSIGNED__} to CPP if @code{char} will be treated as
119 @code{unsigned char} by @code{cc1}.
120
121 Do not define this macro unless you need to override the default
122 definition.
123
124 @findex CC1_SPEC
125 @item CC1_SPEC
126 A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program options to
127 pass to @code{cc1}. It can also specify how to translate options you
128 give to GNU CC into options for GNU CC to pass to the @code{cc1}.
129
130 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
131
132 @findex CC1PLUS_SPEC
133 @item CC1PLUS_SPEC
134 A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program options to
135 pass to @code{cc1plus}. It can also specify how to translate options you
136 give to GNU CC into options for GNU CC to pass to the @code{cc1plus}.
137
138 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
139
140 @findex ASM_SPEC
141 @item ASM_SPEC
142 A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program options to
143 pass to the assembler. It can also specify how to translate options
144 you give to GNU CC into options for GNU CC to pass to the assembler.
145 See the file @file{sun3.h} for an example of this.
146
147 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
148
149 @findex ASM_FINAL_SPEC
150 @item ASM_FINAL_SPEC
151 A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program how to
152 run any programs which cleanup after the normal assembler.
153 Normally, this is not needed. See the file @file{mips.h} for
154 an example of this.
155
156 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
157
158 @findex LINK_SPEC
159 @item LINK_SPEC
160 A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program options to
161 pass to the linker. It can also specify how to translate options you
162 give to GNU CC into options for GNU CC to pass to the linker.
163
164 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
165
166 @findex LIB_SPEC
167 @item LIB_SPEC
168 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The difference
169 between the two is that @code{LIB_SPEC} is used at the end of the
170 command given to the linker.
171
172 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that
173 loads the standard C library from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
174
175 @findex LIBGCC_SPEC
176 @item LIBGCC_SPEC
177 Another C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program
178 how and when to place a reference to @file{libgcc.a} into the
179 linker command line. This constant is placed both before and after
180 the value of @code{LIB_SPEC}.
181
182 If this macro is not defined, the GNU CC driver provides a default that
183 passes the string @samp{-lgcc} to the linker unless the @samp{-shared}
184 option is specified.
185
186 @findex STARTFILE_SPEC
187 @item STARTFILE_SPEC
188 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
189 difference between the two is that @code{STARTFILE_SPEC} is used at
190 the very beginning of the command given to the linker.
191
192 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that loads the
193 standard C startup file from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
194
195 @findex ENDFILE_SPEC
196 @item ENDFILE_SPEC
197 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
198 difference between the two is that @code{ENDFILE_SPEC} is used at
199 the very end of the command given to the linker.
200
201 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
202
203 @findex EXTRA_SPECS
204 @item EXTRA_SPECS
205 Define this macro to provide additional specifications to put in the
206 @file{specs} file that can be used in various specifications like
207 @code{CC1_SPEC}.
208
209 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures,
210 containing a string constant, that defines the specification name, and a
211 string constant that provides the specification.
212
213 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
214
215 @code{EXTRA_SPECS} is useful when an architecture contains several
216 related targets, which have various @code{..._SPECS} which are similar
217 to each other, and the maintainer would like one central place to keep
218 these definitions.
219
220 For example, the PowerPC System V.4 targets use @code{EXTRA_SPECS} to
221 define either @code{_CALL_SYSV} when the System V calling sequence is
222 used or @code{_CALL_AIX} when the older AIX-based calling sequence is
223 used.
224
225 The @file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h} target file defines:
226
227 @example
228 #define EXTRA_SPECS \
229 @{ "cpp_sysv_default", CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT @},
230
231 #define CPP_SYS_DEFAULT ""
232 @end example
233
234 The @file{config/rs6000/sysv.h} target file defines:
235 @smallexample
236 #undef CPP_SPEC
237 #define CPP_SPEC \
238 "%@{posix: -D_POSIX_SOURCE @} \
239 %@{mcall-sysv: -D_CALL_SYSV @} %@{mcall-aix: -D_CALL_AIX @} \
240 %@{!mcall-sysv: %@{!mcall-aix: %(cpp_sysv_default) @}@} \
241 %@{msoft-float: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@} %@{mcpu=403: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@}"
242
243 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
244 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_SYSV"
245 @end smallexample
246
247 while the @file{config/rs6000/eabiaix.h} target file defines
248 @code{CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT} as:
249
250 @smallexample
251 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
252 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_AIX"
253 @end smallexample
254
255 @findex LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL
256 @item LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL
257 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
258 @file{libgcc.a} itself and should not pass @samp{-L} options to the
259 linker. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
260 the argument @samp{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search and will
261 pass @samp{-L} options to it.
262
263 @findex LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
264 @item LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
265 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
266 @file{libgcc.a}. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
267 the argument @samp{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search.
268 This macro is similar to @code{LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL}, except that it does
269 not affect @samp{-L} options.
270
271 @findex MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
272 @item MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
273 Define this macro as a C expression for the initializer of an array of
274 string to tell the driver program which options are defaults for this
275 target and thus do not need to be handled specially when using
276 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS}.
277
278 Do not define this macro if @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} is not defined in
279 the target makefile fragment or if none of the options listed in
280 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} are set by default.
281 @xref{Target Fragment}.
282
283 @findex RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
284 @item RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
285 Define this macro to tell @code{gcc} that it should only translate
286 a @samp{-B} prefix into a @samp{-L} linker option if the prefix
287 indicates an absolute file name.
288
289 @findex STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX
290 @item STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX
291 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
292 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/lib/gcc-lib/} as the default prefix to
293 try when searching for the executable files of the compiler.
294
295 @findex MD_EXEC_PREFIX
296 @item MD_EXEC_PREFIX
297 If defined, this macro is an additional prefix to try after
298 @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched
299 when the @samp{-b} option is used, or the compiler is built as a cross
300 compiler.
301
302 @findex STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
303 @item STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
304 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
305 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/lib/} as the default prefix to
306 try when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
307
308 @findex MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
309 @item MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
310 If defined, this macro supplies an additional prefix to try after the
311 standard prefixes. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched when the
312 @samp{-b} option is used, or when the compiler is built as a cross
313 compiler.
314
315 @findex MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
316 @item MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
317 If defined, this macro supplies yet another prefix to try after the
318 standard prefixes. It is not searched when the @samp{-b} option is
319 used, or when the compiler is built as a cross compiler.
320
321 @findex INIT_ENVIRONMENT
322 @item INIT_ENVIRONMENT
323 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to set environment
324 variables for programs called by the driver, such as the assembler and
325 loader. The driver passes the value of this macro to @code{putenv} to
326 initialize the necessary environment variables.
327
328 @findex LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
329 @item LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
330 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
331 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/include} as the default prefix to
332 try when searching for local header files. @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR}
333 comes before @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR} in the search order.
334
335 Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search either
336 @file{/usr/local/include} or its replacement.
337
338 @findex SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR
339 @item SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR
340 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to specify a
341 system-specific directory to search for header files before the standard
342 directory. @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR} comes before
343 @code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR} in the search order.
344
345 Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search the directory
346 specified.
347
348 @findex STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR
349 @item STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR
350 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
351 standard choice of @file{/usr/include} as the default prefix to
352 try when searching for header files.
353
354 Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search either
355 @file{/usr/include} or its replacement.
356
357 @findex STANDARD_INCLUDE_COMPONENT
358 @item STANDARD_INCLUDE_COMPONENT
359 The ``component'' corresponding to @code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR}.
360 See @code{INCLUDE_DEFAULTS}, below, for the description of components.
361 If you do not define this macro, no component is used.
362
363 @findex INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
364 @item INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
365 Define this macro if you wish to override the entire default search path
366 for include files. For a native compiler, the default search path
367 usually consists of @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR},
368 @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}, and
369 @code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR}. In addition, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}
370 and @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR} are defined automatically by @file{Makefile},
371 and specify private search areas for GCC. The directory
372 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR} is used only for C++ programs.
373
374 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures.
375 Each array element should have four elements: the directory name (a
376 string constant), the component name, and flag for C++-only directories,
377 and a flag showing that the includes in the directory don't need to be
378 wrapped in @code{extern @samp{C}} when compiling C++. Mark the end of
379 the array with a null element.
380
381 The component name denotes what GNU package the include file is part of,
382 if any, in all upper-case letters. For example, it might be @samp{GCC}
383 or @samp{BINUTILS}. If the package is part of the a vendor-supplied
384 operating system, code the component name as @samp{0}.
385
386
387 For example, here is the definition used for VAX/VMS:
388
389 @example
390 #define INCLUDE_DEFAULTS \
391 @{ \
392 @{ "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", "G++", 1, 1@}, \
393 @{ "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", "GCC", 0, 0@}, \
394 @{ "SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSLIB.]", 0, 0, 0@}, \
395 @{ ".", 0, 0, 0@}, \
396 @{ 0, 0, 0, 0@} \
397 @}
398 @end example
399 @end table
400
401 Here is the order of prefixes tried for exec files:
402
403 @enumerate
404 @item
405 Any prefixes specified by the user with @samp{-B}.
406
407 @item
408 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
409
410 @item
411 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{COMPILER_PATH}.
412
413 @item
414 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}.
415
416 @item
417 @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}.
418
419 @item
420 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
421 @end enumerate
422
423 Here is the order of prefixes tried for startfiles:
424
425 @enumerate
426 @item
427 Any prefixes specified by the user with @samp{-B}.
428
429 @item
430 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
431
432 @item
433 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{LIBRARY_PATH}
434 (native only, cross compilers do not use this).
435
436 @item
437 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}.
438
439 @item
440 @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}.
441
442 @item
443 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
444
445 @item
446 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, if any.
447
448 @item
449 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}.
450
451 @item
452 @file{/lib/}.
453
454 @item
455 @file{/usr/lib/}.
456 @end enumerate
457
458 @node Run-time Target
459 @section Run-time Target Specification
460 @cindex run-time target specification
461 @cindex predefined macros
462 @cindex target specifications
463
464 @c prevent bad page break with this line
465 Here are run-time target specifications.
466
467 @table @code
468 @findex CPP_PREDEFINES
469 @item CPP_PREDEFINES
470 Define this to be a string constant containing @samp{-D} options to
471 define the predefined macros that identify this machine and system.
472 These macros will be predefined unless the @samp{-ansi} option is
473 specified.
474
475 In addition, a parallel set of macros are predefined, whose names are
476 made by appending @samp{__} at the beginning and at the end. These
477 @samp{__} macros are permitted by the ANSI standard, so they are
478 predefined regardless of whether @samp{-ansi} is specified.
479
480 For example, on the Sun, one can use the following value:
481
482 @smallexample
483 "-Dmc68000 -Dsun -Dunix"
484 @end smallexample
485
486 The result is to define the macros @code{__mc68000__}, @code{__sun__}
487 and @code{__unix__} unconditionally, and the macros @code{mc68000},
488 @code{sun} and @code{unix} provided @samp{-ansi} is not specified.
489
490 @findex extern int target_flags
491 @item extern int target_flags;
492 This declaration should be present.
493
494 @cindex optional hardware or system features
495 @cindex features, optional, in system conventions
496 @item TARGET_@dots{}
497 This series of macros is to allow compiler command arguments to
498 enable or disable the use of optional features of the target machine.
499 For example, one machine description serves both the 68000 and
500 the 68020; a command argument tells the compiler whether it should
501 use 68020-only instructions or not. This command argument works
502 by means of a macro @code{TARGET_68020} that tests a bit in
503 @code{target_flags}.
504
505 Define a macro @code{TARGET_@var{featurename}} for each such option.
506 Its definition should test a bit in @code{target_flags}; for example:
507
508 @smallexample
509 #define TARGET_68020 (target_flags & 1)
510 @end smallexample
511
512 One place where these macros are used is in the condition-expressions
513 of instruction patterns. Note how @code{TARGET_68020} appears
514 frequently in the 68000 machine description file, @file{m68k.md}.
515 Another place they are used is in the definitions of the other
516 macros in the @file{@var{machine}.h} file.
517
518 @findex TARGET_SWITCHES
519 @item TARGET_SWITCHES
520 This macro defines names of command options to set and clear
521 bits in @code{target_flags}. Its definition is an initializer
522 with a subgrouping for each command option.
523
524 Each subgrouping contains a string constant, that defines the option
525 name, and a number, which contains the bits to set in
526 @code{target_flags}. A negative number says to clear bits instead;
527 the negative of the number is which bits to clear. The actual option
528 name is made by appending @samp{-m} to the specified name.
529
530 One of the subgroupings should have a null string. The number in
531 this grouping is the default value for @code{target_flags}. Any
532 target options act starting with that value.
533
534 Here is an example which defines @samp{-m68000} and @samp{-m68020}
535 with opposite meanings, and picks the latter as the default:
536
537 @smallexample
538 #define TARGET_SWITCHES \
539 @{ @{ "68020", 1@}, \
540 @{ "68000", -1@}, \
541 @{ "", 1@}@}
542 @end smallexample
543
544 @findex TARGET_OPTIONS
545 @item TARGET_OPTIONS
546 This macro is similar to @code{TARGET_SWITCHES} but defines names of command
547 options that have values. Its definition is an initializer with a
548 subgrouping for each command option.
549
550 Each subgrouping contains a string constant, that defines the fixed part
551 of the option name, and the address of a variable. The variable, type
552 @code{char *}, is set to the variable part of the given option if the fixed
553 part matches. The actual option name is made by appending @samp{-m} to the
554 specified name.
555
556 Here is an example which defines @samp{-mshort-data-@var{number}}. If the
557 given option is @samp{-mshort-data-512}, the variable @code{m88k_short_data}
558 will be set to the string @code{"512"}.
559
560 @smallexample
561 extern char *m88k_short_data;
562 #define TARGET_OPTIONS \
563 @{ @{ "short-data-", &m88k_short_data @} @}
564 @end smallexample
565
566 @findex TARGET_VERSION
567 @item TARGET_VERSION
568 This macro is a C statement to print on @code{stderr} a string
569 describing the particular machine description choice. Every machine
570 description should define @code{TARGET_VERSION}. For example:
571
572 @smallexample
573 #ifdef MOTOROLA
574 #define TARGET_VERSION \
575 fprintf (stderr, " (68k, Motorola syntax)");
576 #else
577 #define TARGET_VERSION \
578 fprintf (stderr, " (68k, MIT syntax)");
579 #endif
580 @end smallexample
581
582 @findex OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
583 @item OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
584 Sometimes certain combinations of command options do not make sense on
585 a particular target machine. You can define a macro
586 @code{OVERRIDE_OPTIONS} to take account of this. This macro, if
587 defined, is executed once just after all the command options have been
588 parsed.
589
590 Don't use this macro to turn on various extra optimizations for
591 @samp{-O}. That is what @code{OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS} is for.
592
593 @findex OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS
594 @item OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS (@var{level}, @var{size})
595 Some machines may desire to change what optimizations are performed for
596 various optimization levels. This macro, if defined, is executed once
597 just after the optimization level is determined and before the remainder
598 of the command options have been parsed. Values set in this macro are
599 used as the default values for the other command line options.
600
601 @var{level} is the optimization level specified; 2 if @samp{-O2} is
602 specified, 1 if @samp{-O} is specified, and 0 if neither is specified.
603
604 @var{size} is non-zero if @samp{-Os} is specified and zero otherwise.
605
606 You should not use this macro to change options that are not
607 machine-specific. These should uniformly selected by the same
608 optimization level on all supported machines. Use this macro to enable
609 machine-specific optimizations.
610
611 @strong{Do not examine @code{write_symbols} in
612 this macro!} The debugging options are not supposed to alter the
613 generated code.
614
615 @findex CAN_DEBUG_WITHOUT_FP
616 @item CAN_DEBUG_WITHOUT_FP
617 Define this macro if debugging can be performed even without a frame
618 pointer. If this macro is defined, GNU CC will turn on the
619 @samp{-fomit-frame-pointer} option whenever @samp{-O} is specified.
620 @end table
621
622 @node Storage Layout
623 @section Storage Layout
624 @cindex storage layout
625
626 Note that the definitions of the macros in this table which are sizes or
627 alignments measured in bits do not need to be constant. They can be C
628 expressions that refer to static variables, such as the @code{target_flags}.
629 @xref{Run-time Target}.
630
631 @table @code
632 @findex BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
633 @item BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
634 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant bit in a
635 byte has the lowest number; otherwise define it to have the value zero.
636 This means that bit-field instructions count from the most significant
637 bit. If the machine has no bit-field instructions, then this must still
638 be defined, but it doesn't matter which value it is defined to. This
639 macro need not be a constant.
640
641 This macro does not affect the way structure fields are packed into
642 bytes or words; that is controlled by @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN}.
643
644 @findex BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
645 @item BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
646 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant byte in a
647 word has the lowest number. This macro need not be a constant.
648
649 @findex WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
650 @item WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
651 Define this macro to have the value 1 if, in a multiword object, the
652 most significant word has the lowest number. This applies to both
653 memory locations and registers; GNU CC fundamentally assumes that the
654 order of words in memory is the same as the order in registers. This
655 macro need not be a constant.
656
657 @findex LIBGCC2_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
658 @item LIBGCC2_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
659 Define this macro if WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN is not constant. This must be a
660 constant value with the same meaning as WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN, which will be
661 used only when compiling libgcc2.c. Typically the value will be set
662 based on preprocessor defines.
663
664 @findex FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
665 @item FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
666 Define this macro to have the value 1 if @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} or
667 @code{TFmode} floating point numbers are stored in memory with the word
668 containing the sign bit at the lowest address; otherwise define it to
669 have the value 0. This macro need not be a constant.
670
671 You need not define this macro if the ordering is the same as for
672 multi-word integers.
673
674 @findex BITS_PER_UNIT
675 @item BITS_PER_UNIT
676 Define this macro to be the number of bits in an addressable storage
677 unit (byte); normally 8.
678
679 @findex BITS_PER_WORD
680 @item BITS_PER_WORD
681 Number of bits in a word; normally 32.
682
683 @findex MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
684 @item MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
685 Maximum number of bits in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
686 @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
687 largest value that @code{BITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
688
689 @findex UNITS_PER_WORD
690 @item UNITS_PER_WORD
691 Number of storage units in a word; normally 4.
692
693 @findex MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
694 @item MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
695 Minimum number of units in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
696 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
697 smallest value that @code{UNITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
698
699 @findex POINTER_SIZE
700 @item POINTER_SIZE
701 Width of a pointer, in bits. You must specify a value no wider than the
702 width of @code{Pmode}. If it is not equal to the width of @code{Pmode},
703 you must define @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED}.
704
705 @findex POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
706 @item POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
707 A C expression whose value is nonzero if pointers that need to be
708 extended from being @code{POINTER_SIZE} bits wide to @code{Pmode}
709 are sign-extended and zero if they are zero-extended.
710
711 You need not define this macro if the @code{POINTER_SIZE} is equal
712 to the width of @code{Pmode}.
713
714 @findex PROMOTE_MODE
715 @item PROMOTE_MODE (@var{m}, @var{unsignedp}, @var{type})
716 A macro to update @var{m} and @var{unsignedp} when an object whose type
717 is @var{type} and which has the specified mode and signedness is to be
718 stored in a register. This macro is only called when @var{type} is a
719 scalar type.
720
721 On most RISC machines, which only have operations that operate on a full
722 register, define this macro to set @var{m} to @code{word_mode} if
723 @var{m} is an integer mode narrower than @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. In most
724 cases, only integer modes should be widened because wider-precision
725 floating-point operations are usually more expensive than their narrower
726 counterparts.
727
728 For most machines, the macro definition does not change @var{unsignedp}.
729 However, some machines, have instructions that preferentially handle
730 either signed or unsigned quantities of certain modes. For example, on
731 the DEC Alpha, 32-bit loads from memory and 32-bit add instructions
732 sign-extend the result to 64 bits. On such machines, set
733 @var{unsignedp} according to which kind of extension is more efficient.
734
735 Do not define this macro if it would never modify @var{m}.
736
737 @findex PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS
738 @item PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS
739 Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
740 should also be done for outgoing function arguments.
741
742 @findex PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN
743 @item PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN
744 Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
745 should also be done for the return value of functions.
746
747 If this macro is defined, @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} must perform the same
748 promotions done by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}.
749
750 @findex PROMOTE_FOR_CALL_ONLY
751 @item PROMOTE_FOR_CALL_ONLY
752 Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
753 should @emph{only} be performed for outgoing function arguments or
754 function return values, as specified by @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS}
755 and @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN}, respectively.
756
757 @findex PARM_BOUNDARY
758 @item PARM_BOUNDARY
759 Normal alignment required for function parameters on the stack, in
760 bits. All stack parameters receive at least this much alignment
761 regardless of data type. On most machines, this is the same as the
762 size of an integer.
763
764 @findex STACK_BOUNDARY
765 @item STACK_BOUNDARY
766 Define this macro if you wish to preserve a certain alignment for
767 the stack pointer. The definition is a C expression
768 for the desired alignment (measured in bits).
769
770 @cindex @code{PUSH_ROUNDING}, interaction with @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}
771 If @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} is not defined, the stack will always be aligned
772 to the specified boundary. If @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} is defined and specifies a
773 less strict alignment than @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, the stack may be
774 momentarily unaligned while pushing arguments.
775
776 @findex FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
777 @item FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
778 Alignment required for a function entry point, in bits.
779
780 @findex BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
781 @item BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
782 Biggest alignment that any data type can require on this machine, in bits.
783
784 @findex MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
785 @item MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
786 If defined, the smallest alignment, in bits, that can be given to an
787 object that can be referenced in one operation, without disturbing any
788 nearby object. Normally, this is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}, but may be larger
789 on machines that don't have byte or half-word store operations.
790
791 @findex BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
792 @item BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
793 Biggest alignment that any structure field can require on this machine,
794 in bits. If defined, this overrides @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} for
795 structure fields only.
796
797 @findex ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN
798 @item ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN (@var{field}, @var{computed})
799 An expression for the alignment of a structure field @var{field} if the
800 alignment computed in the usual way is @var{computed}. GNU CC uses
801 this value instead of the value in @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} or
802 @code{BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT}, if defined, for structure fields only.
803
804 @findex MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
805 @item MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
806 Biggest alignment supported by the object file format of this machine.
807 Use this macro to limit the alignment which can be specified using the
808 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. If not defined,
809 the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
810
811 @findex DATA_ALIGNMENT
812 @item DATA_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
813 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a static
814 variable. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is the
815 alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
816 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
817
818 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
819
820 @findex strcpy
821 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
822 make it all fit in fewer cache lines. Another is to cause character
823 arrays to be word-aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
824 constants to character arrays can be done inline.
825
826 @findex CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT
827 @item CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT (@var{constant}, @var{basic-align})
828 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment given to a constant
829 that is being placed in memory. @var{constant} is the constant and
830 @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the object would ordinarily
831 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
832 align the object.
833
834 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
835
836 The typical use of this macro is to increase alignment for string
837 constants to be word aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
838 constants can be done inline.
839
840 @findex EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
841 @item EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
842 Alignment in bits to be given to a structure bit field that follows an
843 empty field such as @code{int : 0;}.
844
845 Note that @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} also affects the alignment
846 that results from an empty field.
847
848 @findex STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
849 @item STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
850 Number of bits which any structure or union's size must be a multiple of.
851 Each structure or union's size is rounded up to a multiple of this.
852
853 If you do not define this macro, the default is the same as
854 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
855
856 @findex STRICT_ALIGNMENT
857 @item STRICT_ALIGNMENT
858 Define this macro to be the value 1 if instructions will fail to work
859 if given data not on the nominal alignment. If instructions will merely
860 go slower in that case, define this macro as 0.
861
862 @findex PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
863 @item PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
864 Define this if you wish to imitate the way many other C compilers handle
865 alignment of bitfields and the structures that contain them.
866
867 The behavior is that the type written for a bitfield (@code{int},
868 @code{short}, or other integer type) imposes an alignment for the
869 entire structure, as if the structure really did contain an ordinary
870 field of that type. In addition, the bitfield is placed within the
871 structure so that it would fit within such a field, not crossing a
872 boundary for it.
873
874 Thus, on most machines, a bitfield whose type is written as @code{int}
875 would not cross a four-byte boundary, and would force four-byte
876 alignment for the whole structure. (The alignment used may not be four
877 bytes; it is controlled by the other alignment parameters.)
878
879 If the macro is defined, its definition should be a C expression;
880 a nonzero value for the expression enables this behavior.
881
882 Note that if this macro is not defined, or its value is zero, some
883 bitfields may cross more than one alignment boundary. The compiler can
884 support such references if there are @samp{insv}, @samp{extv}, and
885 @samp{extzv} insns that can directly reference memory.
886
887 The other known way of making bitfields work is to define
888 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} as large as @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
889 Then every structure can be accessed with fullwords.
890
891 Unless the machine has bitfield instructions or you define
892 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} that way, you must define
893 @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} to have a nonzero value.
894
895 If your aim is to make GNU CC use the same conventions for laying out
896 bitfields as are used by another compiler, here is how to investigate
897 what the other compiler does. Compile and run this program:
898
899 @example
900 struct foo1
901 @{
902 char x;
903 char :0;
904 char y;
905 @};
906
907 struct foo2
908 @{
909 char x;
910 int :0;
911 char y;
912 @};
913
914 main ()
915 @{
916 printf ("Size of foo1 is %d\n",
917 sizeof (struct foo1));
918 printf ("Size of foo2 is %d\n",
919 sizeof (struct foo2));
920 exit (0);
921 @}
922 @end example
923
924 If this prints 2 and 5, then the compiler's behavior is what you would
925 get from @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS}.
926
927 @findex BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
928 @item BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
929 Like PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS except that its effect is limited to
930 aligning a bitfield within the structure.
931
932 @findex ROUND_TYPE_SIZE
933 @item ROUND_TYPE_SIZE (@var{struct}, @var{size}, @var{align})
934 Define this macro as an expression for the overall size of a structure
935 (given by @var{struct} as a tree node) when the size computed from the
936 fields is @var{size} and the alignment is @var{align}.
937
938 The default is to round @var{size} up to a multiple of @var{align}.
939
940 @findex ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN
941 @item ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN (@var{struct}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
942 Define this macro as an expression for the alignment of a structure
943 (given by @var{struct} as a tree node) if the alignment computed in the
944 usual way is @var{computed} and the alignment explicitly specified was
945 @var{specified}.
946
947 The default is to use @var{specified} if it is larger; otherwise, use
948 the smaller of @var{computed} and @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
949
950 @findex MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
951 @item MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
952 An integer expression for the size in bits of the largest integer
953 machine mode that should actually be used. All integer machine modes of
954 this size or smaller can be used for structures and unions with the
955 appropriate sizes. If this macro is undefined, @code{GET_MODE_BITSIZE
956 (DImode)} is assumed.
957
958 @findex CHECK_FLOAT_VALUE
959 @item CHECK_FLOAT_VALUE (@var{mode}, @var{value}, @var{overflow})
960 A C statement to validate the value @var{value} (of type
961 @code{double}) for mode @var{mode}. This means that you check whether
962 @var{value} fits within the possible range of values for mode
963 @var{mode} on this target machine. The mode @var{mode} is always
964 a mode of class @code{MODE_FLOAT}. @var{overflow} is nonzero if
965 the value is already known to be out of range.
966
967 If @var{value} is not valid or if @var{overflow} is nonzero, you should
968 set @var{overflow} to 1 and then assign some valid value to @var{value}.
969 Allowing an invalid value to go through the compiler can produce
970 incorrect assembler code which may even cause Unix assemblers to crash.
971
972 This macro need not be defined if there is no work for it to do.
973
974 @findex TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT
975 @item TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT
976 A code distinguishing the floating point format of the target machine.
977 There are three defined values:
978
979 @table @code
980 @findex IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
981 @item IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
982 This code indicates IEEE floating point. It is the default; there is no
983 need to define this macro when the format is IEEE.
984
985 @findex VAX_FLOAT_FORMAT
986 @item VAX_FLOAT_FORMAT
987 This code indicates the peculiar format used on the Vax.
988
989 @findex UNKNOWN_FLOAT_FORMAT
990 @item UNKNOWN_FLOAT_FORMAT
991 This code indicates any other format.
992 @end table
993
994 The value of this macro is compared with @code{HOST_FLOAT_FORMAT}
995 (@pxref{Config}) to determine whether the target machine has the same
996 format as the host machine. If any other formats are actually in use on
997 supported machines, new codes should be defined for them.
998
999 The ordering of the component words of floating point values stored in
1000 memory is controlled by @code{FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} for the target
1001 machine and @code{HOST_FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} for the host.
1002
1003 @findex DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS
1004 @item DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS
1005 GNU CC supports two ways of implementing C++ vtables: traditional or with
1006 so-called ``thunks''. The flag @samp{-fvtable-thunk} chooses between them.
1007 Define this macro to be a C expression for the default value of that flag.
1008 If @code{DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS} is 0, GNU CC uses the traditional
1009 implementation by default. The ``thunk'' implementation is more efficient
1010 (especially if you have provided an implementation of
1011 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK}, see @ref{Function Entry}), but is not binary
1012 compatible with code compiled using the traditional implementation.
1013 If you are writing a new ports, define @code{DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS} to 1.
1014
1015 If you do not define this macro, the default for @samp{-fvtable-thunk} is 0.
1016 @end table
1017
1018 @node Type Layout
1019 @section Layout of Source Language Data Types
1020
1021 These macros define the sizes and other characteristics of the standard
1022 basic data types used in programs being compiled. Unlike the macros in
1023 the previous section, these apply to specific features of C and related
1024 languages, rather than to fundamental aspects of storage layout.
1025
1026 @table @code
1027 @findex INT_TYPE_SIZE
1028 @item INT_TYPE_SIZE
1029 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the
1030 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1031
1032 @findex MAX_INT_TYPE_SIZE
1033 @item MAX_INT_TYPE_SIZE
1034 Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the target
1035 machine. If this is undefined, the default is @code{INT_TYPE_SIZE}.
1036 Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the largest value that
1037 @code{INT_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is used in @code{cpp}.
1038
1039 @findex SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1040 @item SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1041 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short} on the
1042 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is half a word.
1043 (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up to one
1044 unit.)
1045
1046 @findex LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1047 @item LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1048 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1049 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1050
1051 @findex MAX_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1052 @item MAX_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1053 Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1054 target machine. If this is undefined, the default is
1055 @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
1056 largest value that @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is
1057 used in @code{cpp}.
1058
1059 @findex LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1060 @item LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1061 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long} on the
1062 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1063 words. If you want to support GNU Ada on your machine, the value of
1064 macro must be at least 64.
1065
1066 @findex CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1067 @item CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1068 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1069 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one quarter
1070 of a word. (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up
1071 to one unit.)
1072
1073 @findex MAX_CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1074 @item MAX_CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1075 Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1076 target machine. If this is undefined, the default is
1077 @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
1078 largest value that @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is
1079 used in @code{cpp}.
1080
1081 @findex FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1082 @item FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1083 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{float} on the
1084 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1085
1086 @findex DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1087 @item DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1088 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{double} on the
1089 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1090 words.
1091
1092 @findex LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1093 @item LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1094 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long double} on
1095 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1096 words.
1097
1098 @findex WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1099 @item WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1100 A C expression for the size in bits of the widest floating-point format
1101 supported by the hardware. If you define this macro, you must specify a
1102 value less than or equal to the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.
1103 If you do not define this macro, the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1104 is the default.
1105
1106 @findex DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1107 @item DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1108 An expression whose value is 1 or 0, according to whether the type
1109 @code{char} should be signed or unsigned by default. The user can
1110 always override this default with the options @samp{-fsigned-char}
1111 and @samp{-funsigned-char}.
1112
1113 @findex DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1114 @item DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1115 A C expression to determine whether to give an @code{enum} type
1116 only as many bytes as it takes to represent the range of possible values
1117 of that type. A nonzero value means to do that; a zero value means all
1118 @code{enum} types should be allocated like @code{int}.
1119
1120 If you don't define the macro, the default is 0.
1121
1122 @findex SIZE_TYPE
1123 @item SIZE_TYPE
1124 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1125 for size values. The typedef name @code{size_t} is defined using the
1126 contents of the string.
1127
1128 The string can contain more than one keyword. If so, separate them with
1129 spaces, and write first any length keyword, then @code{unsigned} if
1130 appropriate, and finally @code{int}. The string must exactly match one
1131 of the data type names defined in the function
1132 @code{init_decl_processing} in the file @file{c-decl.c}. You may not
1133 omit @code{int} or change the order---that would cause the compiler to
1134 crash on startup.
1135
1136 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long unsigned
1137 int"}.
1138
1139 @findex PTRDIFF_TYPE
1140 @item PTRDIFF_TYPE
1141 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1142 for the result of subtracting two pointers. The typedef name
1143 @code{ptrdiff_t} is defined using the contents of the string. See
1144 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1145
1146 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long int"}.
1147
1148 @findex WCHAR_TYPE
1149 @item WCHAR_TYPE
1150 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1151 for wide characters. The typedef name @code{wchar_t} is defined using
1152 the contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1153 information.
1154
1155 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"int"}.
1156
1157 @findex WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1158 @item WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1159 A C expression for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1160 characters. This is used in @code{cpp}, which cannot make use of
1161 @code{WCHAR_TYPE}.
1162
1163 @findex MAX_WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1164 @item MAX_WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1165 Maximum number for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1166 characters. If this is undefined, the default is
1167 @code{WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
1168 largest value that @code{WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is
1169 used in @code{cpp}.
1170
1171 @findex OBJC_INT_SELECTORS
1172 @item OBJC_INT_SELECTORS
1173 Define this macro if the type of Objective C selectors should be
1174 @code{int}.
1175
1176 If this macro is not defined, then selectors should have the type
1177 @code{struct objc_selector *}.
1178
1179 @findex OBJC_SELECTORS_WITHOUT_LABELS
1180 @item OBJC_SELECTORS_WITHOUT_LABELS
1181 Define this macro if the compiler can group all the selectors together
1182 into a vector and use just one label at the beginning of the vector.
1183 Otherwise, the compiler must give each selector its own assembler
1184 label.
1185
1186 On certain machines, it is important to have a separate label for each
1187 selector because this enables the linker to eliminate duplicate selectors.
1188
1189 @findex TARGET_BELL
1190 @item TARGET_BELL
1191 A C constant expression for the integer value for escape sequence
1192 @samp{\a}.
1193
1194 @findex TARGET_TAB
1195 @findex TARGET_BS
1196 @findex TARGET_NEWLINE
1197 @item TARGET_BS
1198 @itemx TARGET_TAB
1199 @itemx TARGET_NEWLINE
1200 C constant expressions for the integer values for escape sequences
1201 @samp{\b}, @samp{\t} and @samp{\n}.
1202
1203 @findex TARGET_VT
1204 @findex TARGET_FF
1205 @findex TARGET_CR
1206 @item TARGET_VT
1207 @itemx TARGET_FF
1208 @itemx TARGET_CR
1209 C constant expressions for the integer values for escape sequences
1210 @samp{\v}, @samp{\f} and @samp{\r}.
1211 @end table
1212
1213 @node Registers
1214 @section Register Usage
1215 @cindex register usage
1216
1217 This section explains how to describe what registers the target machine
1218 has, and how (in general) they can be used.
1219
1220 The description of which registers a specific instruction can use is
1221 done with register classes; see @ref{Register Classes}. For information
1222 on using registers to access a stack frame, see @ref{Frame Registers}.
1223 For passing values in registers, see @ref{Register Arguments}.
1224 For returning values in registers, see @ref{Scalar Return}.
1225
1226 @menu
1227 * Register Basics:: Number and kinds of registers.
1228 * Allocation Order:: Order in which registers are allocated.
1229 * Values in Registers:: What kinds of values each reg can hold.
1230 * Leaf Functions:: Renumbering registers for leaf functions.
1231 * Stack Registers:: Handling a register stack such as 80387.
1232 * Obsolete Register Macros:: Macros formerly used for the 80387.
1233 @end menu
1234
1235 @node Register Basics
1236 @subsection Basic Characteristics of Registers
1237
1238 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1239 Registers have various characteristics.
1240
1241 @table @code
1242 @findex FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1243 @item FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1244 Number of hardware registers known to the compiler. They receive
1245 numbers 0 through @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER-1}; thus, the first
1246 pseudo register's number really is assigned the number
1247 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
1248
1249 @item FIXED_REGISTERS
1250 @findex FIXED_REGISTERS
1251 @cindex fixed register
1252 An initializer that says which registers are used for fixed purposes
1253 all throughout the compiled code and are therefore not available for
1254 general allocation. These would include the stack pointer, the frame
1255 pointer (except on machines where that can be used as a general
1256 register when no frame pointer is needed), the program counter on
1257 machines where that is considered one of the addressable registers,
1258 and any other numbered register with a standard use.
1259
1260 This information is expressed as a sequence of numbers, separated by
1261 commas and surrounded by braces. The @var{n}th number is 1 if
1262 register @var{n} is fixed, 0 otherwise.
1263
1264 The table initialized from this macro, and the table initialized by
1265 the following one, may be overridden at run time either automatically,
1266 by the actions of the macro @code{CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}, or by
1267 the user with the command options @samp{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1268 @samp{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @samp{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}}.
1269
1270 @findex CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1271 @item CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1272 @cindex call-used register
1273 @cindex call-clobbered register
1274 @cindex call-saved register
1275 Like @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} but has 1 for each register that is
1276 clobbered (in general) by function calls as well as for fixed
1277 registers. This macro therefore identifies the registers that are not
1278 available for general allocation of values that must live across
1279 function calls.
1280
1281 If a register has 0 in @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}, the compiler
1282 automatically saves it on function entry and restores it on function
1283 exit, if the register is used within the function.
1284
1285 @findex CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1286 @findex fixed_regs
1287 @findex call_used_regs
1288 @item CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1289 Zero or more C statements that may conditionally modify two variables
1290 @code{fixed_regs} and @code{call_used_regs} (both of type @code{char
1291 []}) after they have been initialized from the two preceding macros.
1292
1293 This is necessary in case the fixed or call-clobbered registers depend
1294 on target flags.
1295
1296 You need not define this macro if it has no work to do.
1297
1298 @cindex disabling certain registers
1299 @cindex controlling register usage
1300 If the usage of an entire class of registers depends on the target
1301 flags, you may indicate this to GCC by using this macro to modify
1302 @code{fixed_regs} and @code{call_used_regs} to 1 for each of the
1303 registers in the classes which should not be used by GCC. Also define
1304 the macro @code{REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER} to return @code{NO_REGS} if it
1305 is called with a letter for a class that shouldn't be used.
1306
1307 (However, if this class is not included in @code{GENERAL_REGS} and all
1308 of the insn patterns whose constraints permit this class are
1309 controlled by target switches, then GCC will automatically avoid using
1310 these registers when the target switches are opposed to them.)
1311
1312 @findex NON_SAVING_SETJMP
1313 @item NON_SAVING_SETJMP
1314 If this macro is defined and has a nonzero value, it means that
1315 @code{setjmp} and related functions fail to save the registers, or that
1316 @code{longjmp} fails to restore them. To compensate, the compiler
1317 avoids putting variables in registers in functions that use
1318 @code{setjmp}.
1319
1320 @findex INCOMING_REGNO
1321 @item INCOMING_REGNO (@var{out})
1322 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1323 expression returns the register number as seen by the called function
1324 corresponding to the register number @var{out} as seen by the calling
1325 function. Return @var{out} if register number @var{out} is not an
1326 outbound register.
1327
1328 @findex OUTGOING_REGNO
1329 @item OUTGOING_REGNO (@var{in})
1330 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1331 expression returns the register number as seen by the calling function
1332 corresponding to the register number @var{in} as seen by the called
1333 function. Return @var{in} if register number @var{in} is not an inbound
1334 register.
1335
1336 @ignore
1337 @findex PC_REGNUM
1338 @item PC_REGNUM
1339 If the program counter has a register number, define this as that
1340 register number. Otherwise, do not define it.
1341 @end ignore
1342 @end table
1343
1344 @node Allocation Order
1345 @subsection Order of Allocation of Registers
1346 @cindex order of register allocation
1347 @cindex register allocation order
1348
1349 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1350 Registers are allocated in order.
1351
1352 @table @code
1353 @findex REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1354 @item REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1355 If defined, an initializer for a vector of integers, containing the
1356 numbers of hard registers in the order in which GNU CC should prefer
1357 to use them (from most preferred to least).
1358
1359 If this macro is not defined, registers are used lowest numbered first
1360 (all else being equal).
1361
1362 One use of this macro is on machines where the highest numbered
1363 registers must always be saved and the save-multiple-registers
1364 instruction supports only sequences of consecutive registers. On such
1365 machines, define @code{REG_ALLOC_ORDER} to be an initializer that lists
1366 the highest numbered allocable register first.
1367
1368 @findex ORDER_REGS_FOR_LOCAL_ALLOC
1369 @item ORDER_REGS_FOR_LOCAL_ALLOC
1370 A C statement (sans semicolon) to choose the order in which to allocate
1371 hard registers for pseudo-registers local to a basic block.
1372
1373 Store the desired register order in the array @code{reg_alloc_order}.
1374 Element 0 should be the register to allocate first; element 1, the next
1375 register; and so on.
1376
1377 The macro body should not assume anything about the contents of
1378 @code{reg_alloc_order} before execution of the macro.
1379
1380 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1381 @end table
1382
1383 @node Values in Registers
1384 @subsection How Values Fit in Registers
1385
1386 This section discusses the macros that describe which kinds of values
1387 (specifically, which machine modes) each register can hold, and how many
1388 consecutive registers are needed for a given mode.
1389
1390 @table @code
1391 @findex HARD_REGNO_NREGS
1392 @item HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1393 A C expression for the number of consecutive hard registers, starting
1394 at register number @var{regno}, required to hold a value of mode
1395 @var{mode}.
1396
1397 On a machine where all registers are exactly one word, a suitable
1398 definition of this macro is
1399
1400 @smallexample
1401 #define HARD_REGNO_NREGS(REGNO, MODE) \
1402 ((GET_MODE_SIZE (MODE) + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) \
1403 / UNITS_PER_WORD))
1404 @end smallexample
1405
1406 @findex ALTER_HARD_SUBREG
1407 @item ALTER_HARD_SUBREG (@var{tgt_mode}, @var{word}, @var{src_mode}, @var{regno})
1408 A C expression that returns an adjusted hard register number for
1409
1410 @smallexample
1411 (subreg:@var{tgt_mode} (reg:@var{src_mode} @var{regno}) @var{word})
1412 @end smallexample
1413
1414 This may be needed if the target machine has mixed sized big-endian
1415 registers, like Sparc v9.
1416
1417 @findex HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK
1418 @item HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1419 A C expression that is nonzero if it is permissible to store a value
1420 of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} (or in several
1421 registers starting with that one). For a machine where all registers
1422 are equivalent, a suitable definition is
1423
1424 @smallexample
1425 #define HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK(REGNO, MODE) 1
1426 @end smallexample
1427
1428 You need not include code to check for the numbers of fixed registers,
1429 because the allocation mechanism considers them to be always occupied.
1430
1431 @cindex register pairs
1432 On some machines, double-precision values must be kept in even/odd
1433 register pairs. You can implement that by defining this macro to reject
1434 odd register numbers for such modes.
1435
1436 The minimum requirement for a mode to be OK in a register is that the
1437 @samp{mov@var{mode}} instruction pattern support moves between the
1438 register and other hard register in the same class and that moving a
1439 value into the register and back out not alter it.
1440
1441 Since the same instruction used to move @code{word_mode} will work for
1442 all narrower integer modes, it is not necessary on any machine for
1443 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} to distinguish between these modes, provided
1444 you define patterns @samp{movhi}, etc., to take advantage of this. This
1445 is useful because of the interaction between @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}
1446 and @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P}; it is very desirable for all integer modes
1447 to be tieable.
1448
1449 Many machines have special registers for floating point arithmetic.
1450 Often people assume that floating point machine modes are allowed only
1451 in floating point registers. This is not true. Any registers that
1452 can hold integers can safely @emph{hold} a floating point machine
1453 mode, whether or not floating arithmetic can be done on it in those
1454 registers. Integer move instructions can be used to move the values.
1455
1456 On some machines, though, the converse is true: fixed-point machine
1457 modes may not go in floating registers. This is true if the floating
1458 registers normalize any value stored in them, because storing a
1459 non-floating value there would garble it. In this case,
1460 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} should reject fixed-point machine modes in
1461 floating registers. But if the floating registers do not automatically
1462 normalize, if you can store any bit pattern in one and retrieve it
1463 unchanged without a trap, then any machine mode may go in a floating
1464 register, so you can define this macro to say so.
1465
1466 The primary significance of special floating registers is rather that
1467 they are the registers acceptable in floating point arithmetic
1468 instructions. However, this is of no concern to
1469 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}. You handle it by writing the proper
1470 constraints for those instructions.
1471
1472 On some machines, the floating registers are especially slow to access,
1473 so that it is better to store a value in a stack frame than in such a
1474 register if floating point arithmetic is not being done. As long as the
1475 floating registers are not in class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, they will not
1476 be used unless some pattern's constraint asks for one.
1477
1478 @findex MODES_TIEABLE_P
1479 @item MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})
1480 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode
1481 @var{mode1} is accessible in mode @var{mode2} without copying.
1482
1483 If @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode1})} and
1484 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode2})} are always the same for
1485 any @var{r}, then @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})}
1486 should be nonzero. If they differ for any @var{r}, you should define
1487 this macro to return zero unless some other mechanism ensures the
1488 accessibility of the value in a narrower mode.
1489
1490 You should define this macro to return nonzero in as many cases as
1491 possible since doing so will allow GNU CC to perform better register
1492 allocation.
1493 @end table
1494
1495 @node Leaf Functions
1496 @subsection Handling Leaf Functions
1497
1498 @cindex leaf functions
1499 @cindex functions, leaf
1500 On some machines, a leaf function (i.e., one which makes no calls) can run
1501 more efficiently if it does not make its own register window. Often this
1502 means it is required to receive its arguments in the registers where they
1503 are passed by the caller, instead of the registers where they would
1504 normally arrive.
1505
1506 The special treatment for leaf functions generally applies only when
1507 other conditions are met; for example, often they may use only those
1508 registers for its own variables and temporaries. We use the term ``leaf
1509 function'' to mean a function that is suitable for this special
1510 handling, so that functions with no calls are not necessarily ``leaf
1511 functions''.
1512
1513 GNU CC assigns register numbers before it knows whether the function is
1514 suitable for leaf function treatment. So it needs to renumber the
1515 registers in order to output a leaf function. The following macros
1516 accomplish this.
1517
1518 @table @code
1519 @findex LEAF_REGISTERS
1520 @item LEAF_REGISTERS
1521 A C initializer for a vector, indexed by hard register number, which
1522 contains 1 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
1523 function treatment.
1524
1525 If leaf function treatment involves renumbering the registers, then the
1526 registers marked here should be the ones before renumbering---those that
1527 GNU CC would ordinarily allocate. The registers which will actually be
1528 used in the assembler code, after renumbering, should not be marked with 1
1529 in this vector.
1530
1531 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize
1532 the treatment of leaf functions.
1533
1534 @findex LEAF_REG_REMAP
1535 @item LEAF_REG_REMAP (@var{regno})
1536 A C expression whose value is the register number to which @var{regno}
1537 should be renumbered, when a function is treated as a leaf function.
1538
1539 If @var{regno} is a register number which should not appear in a leaf
1540 function before renumbering, then the expression should yield -1, which
1541 will cause the compiler to abort.
1542
1543 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize the
1544 treatment of leaf functions, and registers need to be renumbered to do
1545 this.
1546 @end table
1547
1548 @findex leaf_function
1549 Normally, @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must
1550 treat leaf functions specially. It can test the C variable
1551 @code{leaf_function} which is nonzero for leaf functions. (The variable
1552 @code{leaf_function} is defined only if @code{LEAF_REGISTERS} is
1553 defined.)
1554 @c changed this to fix overfull. ALSO: why the "it" at the beginning
1555 @c of the next paragraph?! --mew 2feb93
1556
1557 @node Stack Registers
1558 @subsection Registers That Form a Stack
1559
1560 There are special features to handle computers where some of the
1561 ``registers'' form a stack, as in the 80387 coprocessor for the 80386.
1562 Stack registers are normally written by pushing onto the stack, and are
1563 numbered relative to the top of the stack.
1564
1565 Currently, GNU CC can only handle one group of stack-like registers, and
1566 they must be consecutively numbered.
1567
1568 @table @code
1569 @findex STACK_REGS
1570 @item STACK_REGS
1571 Define this if the machine has any stack-like registers.
1572
1573 @findex FIRST_STACK_REG
1574 @item FIRST_STACK_REG
1575 The number of the first stack-like register. This one is the top
1576 of the stack.
1577
1578 @findex LAST_STACK_REG
1579 @item LAST_STACK_REG
1580 The number of the last stack-like register. This one is the bottom of
1581 the stack.
1582 @end table
1583
1584 @node Obsolete Register Macros
1585 @subsection Obsolete Macros for Controlling Register Usage
1586
1587 These features do not work very well. They exist because they used to
1588 be required to generate correct code for the 80387 coprocessor of the
1589 80386. They are no longer used by that machine description and may be
1590 removed in a later version of the compiler. Don't use them!
1591
1592 @table @code
1593 @findex OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P
1594 @item OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
1595 If defined, this is a C expression whose value is nonzero if hard
1596 register number @var{regno} is an overlapping register. This means a
1597 hard register which overlaps a hard register with a different number.
1598 (Such overlap is undesirable, but occasionally it allows a machine to
1599 be supported which otherwise could not be.) This macro must return
1600 nonzero for @emph{all} the registers which overlap each other. GNU CC
1601 can use an overlapping register only in certain limited ways. It can
1602 be used for allocation within a basic block, and may be spilled for
1603 reloading; that is all.
1604
1605 If this macro is not defined, it means that none of the hard registers
1606 overlap each other. This is the usual situation.
1607
1608 @findex INSN_CLOBBERS_REGNO_P
1609 @item INSN_CLOBBERS_REGNO_P (@var{insn}, @var{regno})
1610 If defined, this is a C expression whose value should be nonzero if
1611 the insn @var{insn} has the effect of mysteriously clobbering the
1612 contents of hard register number @var{regno}. By ``mysterious'' we
1613 mean that the insn's RTL expression doesn't describe such an effect.
1614
1615 If this macro is not defined, it means that no insn clobbers registers
1616 mysteriously. This is the usual situation; all else being equal,
1617 it is best for the RTL expression to show all the activity.
1618
1619 @cindex death notes
1620 @findex PRESERVE_DEATH_INFO_REGNO_P
1621 @item PRESERVE_DEATH_INFO_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
1622 If defined, this is a C expression whose value is nonzero if correct
1623 @code{REG_DEAD} notes are needed for hard register number @var{regno}
1624 after reload.
1625
1626 You would arrange to preserve death info for a register when some of the
1627 code in the machine description which is executed to write the assembler
1628 code looks at the death notes. This is necessary only when the actual
1629 hardware feature which GNU CC thinks of as a register is not actually a
1630 register of the usual sort. (It might, for example, be a hardware
1631 stack.)
1632
1633 It is also useful for peepholes and linker relaxation.
1634
1635 If this macro is not defined, it means that no death notes need to be
1636 preserved, and some may even be incorrect. This is the usual situation.
1637 @end table
1638
1639 @node Register Classes
1640 @section Register Classes
1641 @cindex register class definitions
1642 @cindex class definitions, register
1643
1644 On many machines, the numbered registers are not all equivalent.
1645 For example, certain registers may not be allowed for indexed addressing;
1646 certain registers may not be allowed in some instructions. These machine
1647 restrictions are described to the compiler using @dfn{register classes}.
1648
1649 You define a number of register classes, giving each one a name and saying
1650 which of the registers belong to it. Then you can specify register classes
1651 that are allowed as operands to particular instruction patterns.
1652
1653 @findex ALL_REGS
1654 @findex NO_REGS
1655 In general, each register will belong to several classes. In fact, one
1656 class must be named @code{ALL_REGS} and contain all the registers. Another
1657 class must be named @code{NO_REGS} and contain no registers. Often the
1658 union of two classes will be another class; however, this is not required.
1659
1660 @findex GENERAL_REGS
1661 One of the classes must be named @code{GENERAL_REGS}. There is nothing
1662 terribly special about the name, but the operand constraint letters
1663 @samp{r} and @samp{g} specify this class. If @code{GENERAL_REGS} is
1664 the same as @code{ALL_REGS}, just define it as a macro which expands
1665 to @code{ALL_REGS}.
1666
1667 Order the classes so that if class @var{x} is contained in class @var{y}
1668 then @var{x} has a lower class number than @var{y}.
1669
1670 The way classes other than @code{GENERAL_REGS} are specified in operand
1671 constraints is through machine-dependent operand constraint letters.
1672 You can define such letters to correspond to various classes, then use
1673 them in operand constraints.
1674
1675 You should define a class for the union of two classes whenever some
1676 instruction allows both classes. For example, if an instruction allows
1677 either a floating point (coprocessor) register or a general register for a
1678 certain operand, you should define a class @code{FLOAT_OR_GENERAL_REGS}
1679 which includes both of them. Otherwise you will get suboptimal code.
1680
1681 You must also specify certain redundant information about the register
1682 classes: for each class, which classes contain it and which ones are
1683 contained in it; for each pair of classes, the largest class contained
1684 in their union.
1685
1686 When a value occupying several consecutive registers is expected in a
1687 certain class, all the registers used must belong to that class.
1688 Therefore, register classes cannot be used to enforce a requirement for
1689 a register pair to start with an even-numbered register. The way to
1690 specify this requirement is with @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}.
1691
1692 Register classes used for input-operands of bitwise-and or shift
1693 instructions have a special requirement: each such class must have, for
1694 each fixed-point machine mode, a subclass whose registers can transfer that
1695 mode to or from memory. For example, on some machines, the operations for
1696 single-byte values (@code{QImode}) are limited to certain registers. When
1697 this is so, each register class that is used in a bitwise-and or shift
1698 instruction must have a subclass consisting of registers from which
1699 single-byte values can be loaded or stored. This is so that
1700 @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} can always have a possible value to return.
1701
1702 @table @code
1703 @findex enum reg_class
1704 @item enum reg_class
1705 An enumeral type that must be defined with all the register class names
1706 as enumeral values. @code{NO_REGS} must be first. @code{ALL_REGS}
1707 must be the last register class, followed by one more enumeral value,
1708 @code{LIM_REG_CLASSES}, which is not a register class but rather
1709 tells how many classes there are.
1710
1711 Each register class has a number, which is the value of casting
1712 the class name to type @code{int}. The number serves as an index
1713 in many of the tables described below.
1714
1715 @findex N_REG_CLASSES
1716 @item N_REG_CLASSES
1717 The number of distinct register classes, defined as follows:
1718
1719 @example
1720 #define N_REG_CLASSES (int) LIM_REG_CLASSES
1721 @end example
1722
1723 @findex REG_CLASS_NAMES
1724 @item REG_CLASS_NAMES
1725 An initializer containing the names of the register classes as C string
1726 constants. These names are used in writing some of the debugging dumps.
1727
1728 @findex REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
1729 @item REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
1730 An initializer containing the contents of the register classes, as integers
1731 which are bit masks. The @var{n}th integer specifies the contents of class
1732 @var{n}. The way the integer @var{mask} is interpreted is that
1733 register @var{r} is in the class if @code{@var{mask} & (1 << @var{r})} is 1.
1734
1735 When the machine has more than 32 registers, an integer does not suffice.
1736 Then the integers are replaced by sub-initializers, braced groupings containing
1737 several integers. Each sub-initializer must be suitable as an initializer
1738 for the type @code{HARD_REG_SET} which is defined in @file{hard-reg-set.h}.
1739
1740 @findex REGNO_REG_CLASS
1741 @item REGNO_REG_CLASS (@var{regno})
1742 A C expression whose value is a register class containing hard register
1743 @var{regno}. In general there is more than one such class; choose a class
1744 which is @dfn{minimal}, meaning that no smaller class also contains the
1745 register.
1746
1747 @findex BASE_REG_CLASS
1748 @item BASE_REG_CLASS
1749 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
1750 base register must belong. A base register is one used in an address
1751 which is the register value plus a displacement.
1752
1753 @findex INDEX_REG_CLASS
1754 @item INDEX_REG_CLASS
1755 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
1756 index register must belong. An index register is one used in an
1757 address where its value is either multiplied by a scale factor or
1758 added to another register (as well as added to a displacement).
1759
1760 @findex REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER
1761 @item REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER (@var{char})
1762 A C expression which defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
1763 letters for register classes. If @var{char} is such a letter, the
1764 value should be the register class corresponding to it. Otherwise,
1765 the value should be @code{NO_REGS}. The register letter @samp{r},
1766 corresponding to class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, will not be passed
1767 to this macro; you do not need to handle it.
1768
1769 @findex REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P
1770 @item REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num})
1771 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
1772 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses. It may be
1773 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
1774 allocated such a hard register.
1775
1776 @findex REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P
1777 @item REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
1778 A C expression that is just like @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
1779 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
1780 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
1781 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
1782 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
1783 @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
1784
1785 @findex REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P
1786 @item REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{num})
1787 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
1788 suitable for use as an index register in operand addresses. It may be
1789 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
1790 allocated such a hard register.
1791
1792 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
1793 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
1794 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
1795 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
1796 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
1797 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
1798 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
1799 only if neither labeling works.
1800
1801 @findex PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS
1802 @item PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
1803 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
1804 to use when it is necessary to copy value @var{x} into a register in class
1805 @var{class}. The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps
1806 another, smaller class. On many machines, the following definition is
1807 safe:
1808
1809 @example
1810 #define PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS(X,CLASS) CLASS
1811 @end example
1812
1813 Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code. For
1814 example, on the 68000, when @var{x} is an integer constant that is in range
1815 for a @samp{moveq} instruction, the value of this macro is always
1816 @code{DATA_REGS} as long as @var{class} includes the data registers.
1817 Requiring a data register guarantees that a @samp{moveq} will be used.
1818
1819 If @var{x} is a @code{const_double}, by returning @code{NO_REGS}
1820 you can force @var{x} into a memory constant. This is useful on
1821 certain machines where immediate floating values cannot be loaded into
1822 certain kinds of registers.
1823
1824 @findex PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1825 @item PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
1826 Like @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, but for output reloads instead of
1827 input reloads. If you don't define this macro, the default is to use
1828 @var{class}, unchanged.
1829
1830 @findex LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS
1831 @item LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{class})
1832 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
1833 to use when it is necessary to be able to hold a value of mode
1834 @var{mode} in a reload register for which class @var{class} would
1835 ordinarily be used.
1836
1837 Unlike @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, this macro should be used when
1838 there are certain modes that simply can't go in certain reload classes.
1839
1840 The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps another,
1841 smaller class.
1842
1843 Don't define this macro unless the target machine has limitations which
1844 require the macro to do something nontrivial.
1845
1846 @findex SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS
1847 @findex SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1848 @findex SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1849 @item SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
1850 @itemx SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
1851 @itemx SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
1852 Many machines have some registers that cannot be copied directly to or
1853 from memory or even from other types of registers. An example is the
1854 @samp{MQ} register, which on most machines, can only be copied to or
1855 from general registers, but not memory. Some machines allow copying all
1856 registers to and from memory, but require a scratch register for stores
1857 to some memory locations (e.g., those with symbolic address on the RT,
1858 and those with certain symbolic address on the Sparc when compiling
1859 PIC). In some cases, both an intermediate and a scratch register are
1860 required.
1861
1862 You should define these macros to indicate to the reload phase that it may
1863 need to allocate at least one register for a reload in addition to the
1864 register to contain the data. Specifically, if copying @var{x} to a
1865 register @var{class} in @var{mode} requires an intermediate register,
1866 you should define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to return the
1867 largest register class all of whose registers can be used as
1868 intermediate registers or scratch registers.
1869
1870 If copying a register @var{class} in @var{mode} to @var{x} requires an
1871 intermediate or scratch register, @code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS}
1872 should be defined to return the largest register class required. If the
1873 requirements for input and output reloads are the same, the macro
1874 @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} should be used instead of defining both
1875 macros identically.
1876
1877 The values returned by these macros are often @code{GENERAL_REGS}.
1878 Return @code{NO_REGS} if no spare register is needed; i.e., if @var{x}
1879 can be directly copied to or from a register of @var{class} in
1880 @var{mode} without requiring a scratch register. Do not define this
1881 macro if it would always return @code{NO_REGS}.
1882
1883 If a scratch register is required (either with or without an
1884 intermediate register), you should define patterns for
1885 @samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}}, as required
1886 (@pxref{Standard Names}. These patterns, which will normally be
1887 implemented with a @code{define_expand}, should be similar to the
1888 @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, except that operand 2 is the scratch
1889 register.
1890
1891 Define constraints for the reload register and scratch register that
1892 contain a single register class. If the original reload register (whose
1893 class is @var{class}) can meet the constraint given in the pattern, the
1894 value returned by these macros is used for the class of the scratch
1895 register. Otherwise, two additional reload registers are required.
1896 Their classes are obtained from the constraints in the insn pattern.
1897
1898 @var{x} might be a pseudo-register or a @code{subreg} of a
1899 pseudo-register, which could either be in a hard register or in memory.
1900 Use @code{true_regnum} to find out; it will return -1 if the pseudo is
1901 in memory and the hard register number if it is in a register.
1902
1903 These macros should not be used in the case where a particular class of
1904 registers can only be copied to memory and not to another class of
1905 registers. In that case, secondary reload registers are not needed and
1906 would not be helpful. Instead, a stack location must be used to perform
1907 the copy and the @code{mov@var{m}} pattern should use memory as a
1908 intermediate storage. This case often occurs between floating-point and
1909 general registers.
1910
1911 @findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
1912 @item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (@var{class1}, @var{class2}, @var{m})
1913 Certain machines have the property that some registers cannot be copied
1914 to some other registers without using memory. Define this macro on
1915 those machines to be a C expression that is non-zero if objects of mode
1916 @var{m} in registers of @var{class1} can only be copied to registers of
1917 class @var{class2} by storing a register of @var{class1} into memory
1918 and loading that memory location into a register of @var{class2}.
1919
1920 Do not define this macro if its value would always be zero.
1921
1922 @findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX
1923 @item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (@var{mode})
1924 Normally when @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} is defined, the compiler
1925 allocates a stack slot for a memory location needed for register copies.
1926 If this macro is defined, the compiler instead uses the memory location
1927 defined by this macro.
1928
1929 Do not define this macro if you do not define
1930 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED}.
1931
1932 @findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE
1933 @item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE (@var{mode})
1934 When the compiler needs a secondary memory location to copy between two
1935 registers of mode @var{mode}, it normally allocates sufficient memory to
1936 hold a quantity of @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits and performs the store and
1937 load operations in a mode that many bits wide and whose class is the
1938 same as that of @var{mode}.
1939
1940 This is right thing to do on most machines because it ensures that all
1941 bits of the register are copied and prevents accesses to the registers
1942 in a narrower mode, which some machines prohibit for floating-point
1943 registers.
1944
1945 However, this default behavior is not correct on some machines, such as
1946 the DEC Alpha, that store short integers in floating-point registers
1947 differently than in integer registers. On those machines, the default
1948 widening will not work correctly and you must define this macro to
1949 suppress that widening in some cases. See the file @file{alpha.h} for
1950 details.
1951
1952 Do not define this macro if you do not define
1953 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} or if widening @var{mode} to a mode that
1954 is @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits wide is correct for your machine.
1955
1956 @findex SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
1957 @item SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
1958 Normally the compiler avoids choosing registers that have been
1959 explicitly mentioned in the rtl as spill registers (these registers are
1960 normally those used to pass parameters and return values). However,
1961 some machines have so few registers of certain classes that there
1962 would not be enough registers to use as spill registers if this were
1963 done.
1964
1965 Define @code{SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES} to be an expression with a non-zero
1966 value on these machines. When this macro has a non-zero value, the
1967 compiler allows registers explicitly used in the rtl to be used as spill
1968 registers but avoids extending the lifetime of these registers.
1969
1970 It is always safe to define this macro with a non-zero value, but if you
1971 unnecessarily define it, you will reduce the amount of optimizations
1972 that can be performed in some cases. If you do not define this macro
1973 with a non-zero value when it is required, the compiler will run out of
1974 spill registers and print a fatal error message. For most machines, you
1975 should not define this macro at all.
1976
1977 @findex CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P
1978 @item CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P (@var{class})
1979 A C expression whose value is nonzero if pseudos that have been assigned
1980 to registers of class @var{class} would likely be spilled because
1981 registers of @var{class} are needed for spill registers.
1982
1983 The default value of this macro returns 1 if @var{class} has exactly one
1984 register and zero otherwise. On most machines, this default should be
1985 used. Only define this macro to some other expression if pseudos
1986 allocated by @file{local-alloc.c} end up in memory because their hard
1987 registers were needed for spill registers. If this macro returns nonzero
1988 for those classes, those pseudos will only be allocated by
1989 @file{global.c}, which knows how to reallocate the pseudo to another
1990 register. If there would not be another register available for
1991 reallocation, you should not change the definition of this macro since
1992 the only effect of such a definition would be to slow down register
1993 allocation.
1994
1995 @findex CLASS_MAX_NREGS
1996 @item CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})
1997 A C expression for the maximum number of consecutive registers
1998 of class @var{class} needed to hold a value of mode @var{mode}.
1999
2000 This is closely related to the macro @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}. In fact,
2001 the value of the macro @code{CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})}
2002 should be the maximum value of @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno},
2003 @var{mode})} for all @var{regno} values in the class @var{class}.
2004
2005 This macro helps control the handling of multiple-word values
2006 in the reload pass.
2007
2008 @item CLASS_CANNOT_CHANGE_SIZE
2009 If defined, a C expression for a class that contains registers which the
2010 compiler must always access in a mode that is the same size as the mode
2011 in which it loaded the register.
2012
2013 For the example, loading 32-bit integer or floating-point objects into
2014 floating-point registers on the Alpha extends them to 64-bits.
2015 Therefore loading a 64-bit object and then storing it as a 32-bit object
2016 does not store the low-order 32-bits, as would be the case for a normal
2017 register. Therefore, @file{alpha.h} defines this macro as
2018 @code{FLOAT_REGS}.
2019 @end table
2020
2021 Three other special macros describe which operands fit which constraint
2022 letters.
2023
2024 @table @code
2025 @findex CONST_OK_FOR_LETTER_P
2026 @item CONST_OK_FOR_LETTER_P (@var{value}, @var{c})
2027 A C expression that defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
2028 letters (@samp{I}, @samp{J}, @samp{K}, @dots{} @samp{P}) that specify
2029 particular ranges of integer values. If @var{c} is one of those
2030 letters, the expression should check that @var{value}, an integer, is in
2031 the appropriate range and return 1 if so, 0 otherwise. If @var{c} is
2032 not one of those letters, the value should be 0 regardless of
2033 @var{value}.
2034
2035 @findex CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_LETTER_P
2036 @item CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_LETTER_P (@var{value}, @var{c})
2037 A C expression that defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
2038 letters that specify particular ranges of @code{const_double} values
2039 (@samp{G} or @samp{H}).
2040
2041 If @var{c} is one of those letters, the expression should check that
2042 @var{value}, an RTX of code @code{const_double}, is in the appropriate
2043 range and return 1 if so, 0 otherwise. If @var{c} is not one of those
2044 letters, the value should be 0 regardless of @var{value}.
2045
2046 @code{const_double} is used for all floating-point constants and for
2047 @code{DImode} fixed-point constants. A given letter can accept either
2048 or both kinds of values. It can use @code{GET_MODE} to distinguish
2049 between these kinds.
2050
2051 @findex EXTRA_CONSTRAINT
2052 @item EXTRA_CONSTRAINT (@var{value}, @var{c})
2053 A C expression that defines the optional machine-dependent constraint
2054 letters (@samp{Q}, @samp{R}, @samp{S}, @samp{T}, @samp{U}) that can
2055 be used to segregate specific types of operands, usually memory
2056 references, for the target machine. Normally this macro will not be
2057 defined. If it is required for a particular target machine, it should
2058 return 1 if @var{value} corresponds to the operand type represented by
2059 the constraint letter @var{c}. If @var{c} is not defined as an extra
2060 constraint, the value returned should be 0 regardless of @var{value}.
2061
2062 For example, on the ROMP, load instructions cannot have their output in r0 if
2063 the memory reference contains a symbolic address. Constraint letter
2064 @samp{Q} is defined as representing a memory address that does
2065 @emph{not} contain a symbolic address. An alternative is specified with
2066 a @samp{Q} constraint on the input and @samp{r} on the output. The next
2067 alternative specifies @samp{m} on the input and a register class that
2068 does not include r0 on the output.
2069 @end table
2070
2071 @node Stack and Calling
2072 @section Stack Layout and Calling Conventions
2073 @cindex calling conventions
2074
2075 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2076 This describes the stack layout and calling conventions.
2077
2078 @menu
2079 * Frame Layout::
2080 * Stack Checking::
2081 * Frame Registers::
2082 * Elimination::
2083 * Stack Arguments::
2084 * Register Arguments::
2085 * Scalar Return::
2086 * Aggregate Return::
2087 * Caller Saves::
2088 * Function Entry::
2089 * Profiling::
2090 @end menu
2091
2092 @node Frame Layout
2093 @subsection Basic Stack Layout
2094 @cindex stack frame layout
2095 @cindex frame layout
2096
2097 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2098 Here is the basic stack layout.
2099
2100 @table @code
2101 @findex STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2102 @item STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2103 Define this macro if pushing a word onto the stack moves the stack
2104 pointer to a smaller address.
2105
2106 When we say, ``define this macro if @dots{},'' it means that the
2107 compiler checks this macro only with @code{#ifdef} so the precise
2108 definition used does not matter.
2109
2110 @findex FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2111 @item FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2112 Define this macro if the addresses of local variable slots are at negative
2113 offsets from the frame pointer.
2114
2115 @findex ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2116 @item ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2117 Define this macro if successive arguments to a function occupy decreasing
2118 addresses on the stack.
2119
2120 @findex STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2121 @item STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2122 Offset from the frame pointer to the first local variable slot to be allocated.
2123
2124 If @code{FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD}, find the next slot's offset by
2125 subtracting the first slot's length from @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2126 Otherwise, it is found by adding the length of the first slot to the
2127 value @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2128 @c i'm not sure if the above is still correct.. had to change it to get
2129 @c rid of an overfull. --mew 2feb93
2130
2131 @findex STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2132 @item STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2133 Offset from the stack pointer register to the first location at which
2134 outgoing arguments are placed. If not specified, the default value of
2135 zero is used. This is the proper value for most machines.
2136
2137 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2138 the first location at which outgoing arguments are placed.
2139
2140 @findex FIRST_PARM_OFFSET
2141 @item FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2142 Offset from the argument pointer register to the first argument's
2143 address. On some machines it may depend on the data type of the
2144 function.
2145
2146 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2147 the first argument's address.
2148
2149 @findex STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET
2150 @item STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2151 Offset from the stack pointer register to an item dynamically allocated
2152 on the stack, e.g., by @code{alloca}.
2153
2154 The default value for this macro is @code{STACK_POINTER_OFFSET} plus the
2155 length of the outgoing arguments. The default is correct for most
2156 machines. See @file{function.c} for details.
2157
2158 @findex DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS
2159 @item DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (@var{frameaddr})
2160 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address in a stack
2161 frame where the pointer to the caller's frame is stored. Assume that
2162 @var{frameaddr} is an RTL expression for the address of the stack frame
2163 itself.
2164
2165 If you don't define this macro, the default is to return the value
2166 of @var{frameaddr}---that is, the stack frame address is also the
2167 address of the stack word that points to the previous frame.
2168
2169 @findex SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
2170 @item SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES ()
2171 If defined, a C expression that produces the machine-specific code to
2172 setup the stack so that arbitrary frames can be accessed. For example,
2173 on the Sparc, we must flush all of the register windows to the stack
2174 before we can access arbitrary stack frames.
2175 This macro will seldom need to be defined.
2176
2177 @findex RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2178 @item RETURN_ADDR_RTX (@var{count}, @var{frameaddr})
2179 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the return
2180 address for the frame @var{count} steps up from the current frame, after
2181 the prologue. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer of the @var{count}
2182 frame, or the frame pointer of the @var{count} @minus{} 1 frame if
2183 @code{RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME} is defined.
2184
2185 The value of the expression must always be the correct address when
2186 @var{count} is zero, but may be @code{NULL_RTX} if there is not way to
2187 determine the return address of other frames.
2188
2189 @findex RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2190 @item RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2191 Define this if the return address of a particular stack frame is accessed
2192 from the frame pointer of the previous stack frame.
2193
2194 @findex INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2195 @item INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2196 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the location of the
2197 incoming return address at the beginning of any function, before the
2198 prologue. This RTL is either a @code{REG}, indicating that the return
2199 value is saved in @samp{REG}, or a @code{MEM} representing a location in
2200 the stack.
2201
2202 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2203 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2204
2205 @findex INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2206 @item INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2207 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2208 from the value of the stack pointer register to the top of the stack
2209 frame at the beginning of any function, before the prologue. The top of
2210 the frame is defined to be the value of the stack pointer in the
2211 previous frame, just before the call instruction.
2212
2213 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2214 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2215 @end table
2216
2217 @node Stack Checking
2218 @subsection Specifying How Stack Checking is Done
2219
2220 GNU CC will check that stack references are within the boundaries of
2221 the stack, if the @samp{-fstack-check} is specified, in one of three ways:
2222
2223 @enumerate
2224 @item
2225 If the value of the @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GNU CC
2226 will assume that you have arranged for stack checking to be done at
2227 appropriate places in the configuration files, e.g., in
2228 @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE}. GNU CC will do not other special processing.
2229
2230 @item
2231 If @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} is zero and you defined a named pattern
2232 called @code{check_stack} in your @file{md} file, GNU CC will call that
2233 pattern with one argument which is the address to compare the stack
2234 value against. You must arrange for this pattern to report an error if
2235 the stack pointer is out of range.
2236
2237 @item
2238 If neither of the above are true, GNU CC will generate code to periodically
2239 ``probe'' the stack pointer using the values of the macros defined below.
2240 @end enumerate
2241
2242 Normally, you will use the default values of these macros, so GNU CC
2243 will use the third approach.
2244
2245 @table @code
2246 @findex STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2247 @item STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2248 A nonzero value if stack checking is done by the configuration files in a
2249 machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if stack checking
2250 is require by the ABI of your machine or if you would like to have to stack
2251 checking in some more efficient way than GNU CC's portable approach.
2252 The default value of this macro is zero.
2253
2254 @findex STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL
2255 @item STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL
2256 An integer representing the interval at which GNU CC must generate stack
2257 probe instructions. You will normally define this macro to be no larger
2258 than the size of the ``guard pages'' at the end of a stack area. The
2259 default value of 4096 is suitable for most systems.
2260
2261 @findex STACK_CHECK_PROBE_LOAD
2262 @item STACK_CHECK_PROBE_LOAD
2263 A integer which is nonzero if GNU CC should perform the stack probe
2264 as a load instruction and zero if GNU CC should use a store instruction.
2265 The default is zero, which is the most efficient choice on most systems.
2266
2267 @findex STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2268 @item STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2269 The number of bytes of stack needed to recover from a stack overflow,
2270 for languages where such a recovery is supported. The default value of
2271 75 words should be adequate for most machines.
2272
2273 @findex STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2274 @item STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2275 The maximum size of a stack frame, in bytes. GNU CC will generate probe
2276 instructions in non-leaf functions to ensure at least this many bytes of
2277 stack are available. If a stack frame is larger than this size, stack
2278 checking will not be reliable and GNU CC will issue a warning. The
2279 default is chosen so that GNU CC only generates one instruction on most
2280 systems. You should normally not change the default value of this macro.
2281
2282 @findex STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2283 @item STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2284 GNU CC uses this value to generate the above warning message. It
2285 represents the amount of fixed frame used by a function, not including
2286 space for any callee-saved registers, temporaries and user variables.
2287 You need only specify an upper bound for this amount and will normally
2288 use the default of four words.
2289
2290 @findex STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2291 @item STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2292 The maximum size, in bytes, of an object that GNU CC will place in the
2293 fixed area of the stack frame when the user specifies
2294 @samp{-fstack-check}.
2295 GNU CC computed the default from the values of the above macros and you will
2296 normally not need to override that default.
2297 @end table
2298
2299 @need 2000
2300 @node Frame Registers
2301 @subsection Registers That Address the Stack Frame
2302
2303 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2304 This discusses registers that address the stack frame.
2305
2306 @table @code
2307 @findex STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2308 @item STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2309 The register number of the stack pointer register, which must also be a
2310 fixed register according to @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}. On most machines,
2311 the hardware determines which register this is.
2312
2313 @findex FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2314 @item FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2315 The register number of the frame pointer register, which is used to
2316 access automatic variables in the stack frame. On some machines, the
2317 hardware determines which register this is. On other machines, you can
2318 choose any register you wish for this purpose.
2319
2320 @findex HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2321 @item HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2322 On some machines the offset between the frame pointer and starting
2323 offset of the automatic variables is not known until after register
2324 allocation has been done (for example, because the saved registers are
2325 between these two locations). On those machines, define
2326 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} the number of a special, fixed register to
2327 be used internally until the offset is known, and define
2328 @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} to be the actual hard register number
2329 used for the frame pointer.
2330
2331 You should define this macro only in the very rare circumstances when it
2332 is not possible to calculate the offset between the frame pointer and
2333 the automatic variables until after register allocation has been
2334 completed. When this macro is defined, you must also indicate in your
2335 definition of @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} how to eliminate
2336 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} into either @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}
2337 or @code{STACK_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2338
2339 Do not define this macro if it would be the same as
2340 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2341
2342 @findex ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2343 @item ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2344 The register number of the arg pointer register, which is used to access
2345 the function's argument list. On some machines, this is the same as the
2346 frame pointer register. On some machines, the hardware determines which
2347 register this is. On other machines, you can choose any register you
2348 wish for this purpose. If this is not the same register as the frame
2349 pointer register, then you must mark it as a fixed register according to
2350 @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, or arrange to be able to eliminate it
2351 (@pxref{Elimination}).
2352
2353 @findex RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
2354 @item RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
2355 The register number of the return address pointer register, which is used to
2356 access the current function's return address from the stack. On some
2357 machines, the return address is not at a fixed offset from the frame
2358 pointer or stack pointer or argument pointer. This register can be defined
2359 to point to the return address on the stack, and then be converted by
2360 @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} into either the frame pointer or stack pointer.
2361
2362 Do not define this macro unless there is no other way to get the return
2363 address from the stack.
2364
2365 @findex STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
2366 @findex STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
2367 @item STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
2368 @itemx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
2369 Register numbers used for passing a function's static chain pointer. If
2370 register windows are used, the register number as seen by the called
2371 function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM}, while the register
2372 number as seen by the calling function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM}. If
2373 these registers are the same, @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM} need
2374 not be defined.@refill
2375
2376 The static chain register need not be a fixed register.
2377
2378 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros should not be
2379 defined; instead, the next two macros should be defined.
2380
2381 @findex STATIC_CHAIN
2382 @findex STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING
2383 @item STATIC_CHAIN
2384 @itemx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING
2385 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros provide rtx giving
2386 @code{mem} expressions that denote where they are stored.
2387 @code{STATIC_CHAIN} and @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING} give the locations
2388 as seen by the calling and called functions, respectively. Often the former
2389 will be at an offset from the stack pointer and the latter at an offset from
2390 the frame pointer.@refill
2391
2392 @findex stack_pointer_rtx
2393 @findex frame_pointer_rtx
2394 @findex arg_pointer_rtx
2395 The variables @code{stack_pointer_rtx}, @code{frame_pointer_rtx}, and
2396 @code{arg_pointer_rtx} will have been initialized prior to the use of these
2397 macros and should be used to refer to those items.
2398
2399 If the static chain is passed in a register, the two previous macros should
2400 be defined instead.
2401 @end table
2402
2403 @node Elimination
2404 @subsection Eliminating Frame Pointer and Arg Pointer
2405
2406 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2407 This is about eliminating the frame pointer and arg pointer.
2408
2409 @table @code
2410 @findex FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
2411 @item FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
2412 A C expression which is nonzero if a function must have and use a frame
2413 pointer. This expression is evaluated in the reload pass. If its value is
2414 nonzero the function will have a frame pointer.
2415
2416 The expression can in principle examine the current function and decide
2417 according to the facts, but on most machines the constant 0 or the
2418 constant 1 suffices. Use 0 when the machine allows code to be generated
2419 with no frame pointer, and doing so saves some time or space. Use 1
2420 when there is no possible advantage to avoiding a frame pointer.
2421
2422 In certain cases, the compiler does not know how to produce valid code
2423 without a frame pointer. The compiler recognizes those cases and
2424 automatically gives the function a frame pointer regardless of what
2425 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} says. You don't need to worry about
2426 them.@refill
2427
2428 In a function that does not require a frame pointer, the frame pointer
2429 register can be allocated for ordinary usage, unless you mark it as a
2430 fixed register. See @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} for more information.
2431
2432 @findex INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET
2433 @findex get_frame_size
2434 @item INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET (@var{depth-var})
2435 A C statement to store in the variable @var{depth-var} the difference
2436 between the frame pointer and the stack pointer values immediately after
2437 the function prologue. The value would be computed from information
2438 such as the result of @code{get_frame_size ()} and the tables of
2439 registers @code{regs_ever_live} and @code{call_used_regs}.
2440
2441 If @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is defined, this macro will be not be used and
2442 need not be defined. Otherwise, it must be defined even if
2443 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} is defined to always be true; in that
2444 case, you may set @var{depth-var} to anything.
2445
2446 @findex ELIMINABLE_REGS
2447 @item ELIMINABLE_REGS
2448 If defined, this macro specifies a table of register pairs used to
2449 eliminate unneeded registers that point into the stack frame. If it is not
2450 defined, the only elimination attempted by the compiler is to replace
2451 references to the frame pointer with references to the stack pointer.
2452
2453 The definition of this macro is a list of structure initializations, each
2454 of which specifies an original and replacement register.
2455
2456 On some machines, the position of the argument pointer is not known until
2457 the compilation is completed. In such a case, a separate hard register
2458 must be used for the argument pointer. This register can be eliminated by
2459 replacing it with either the frame pointer or the argument pointer,
2460 depending on whether or not the frame pointer has been eliminated.
2461
2462 In this case, you might specify:
2463 @example
2464 #define ELIMINABLE_REGS \
2465 @{@{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
2466 @{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
2467 @{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}@}
2468 @end example
2469
2470 Note that the elimination of the argument pointer with the stack pointer is
2471 specified first since that is the preferred elimination.
2472
2473 @findex CAN_ELIMINATE
2474 @item CAN_ELIMINATE (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg})
2475 A C expression that returns non-zero if the compiler is allowed to try
2476 to replace register number @var{from-reg} with register number
2477 @var{to-reg}. This macro need only be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS}
2478 is defined, and will usually be the constant 1, since most of the cases
2479 preventing register elimination are things that the compiler already
2480 knows about.
2481
2482 @findex INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET
2483 @item INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg}, @var{offset-var})
2484 This macro is similar to @code{INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET}. It
2485 specifies the initial difference between the specified pair of
2486 registers. This macro must be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is
2487 defined.
2488
2489 @findex LONGJMP_RESTORE_FROM_STACK
2490 @item LONGJMP_RESTORE_FROM_STACK
2491 Define this macro if the @code{longjmp} function restores registers from
2492 the stack frames, rather than from those saved specifically by
2493 @code{setjmp}. Certain quantities must not be kept in registers across
2494 a call to @code{setjmp} on such machines.
2495 @end table
2496
2497 @node Stack Arguments
2498 @subsection Passing Function Arguments on the Stack
2499 @cindex arguments on stack
2500 @cindex stack arguments
2501
2502 The macros in this section control how arguments are passed
2503 on the stack. See the following section for other macros that
2504 control passing certain arguments in registers.
2505
2506 @table @code
2507 @findex PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
2508 @item PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
2509 Define this macro if an argument declared in a prototype as an
2510 integral type smaller than @code{int} should actually be passed as an
2511 @code{int}. In addition to avoiding errors in certain cases of
2512 mismatch, it also makes for better code on certain machines.
2513
2514 @findex PUSH_ROUNDING
2515 @item PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
2516 A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
2517 stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
2518
2519 If the target machine does not have a push instruction, do not define
2520 this macro. That directs GNU CC to use an alternate strategy: to
2521 allocate the entire argument block and then store the arguments into
2522 it.
2523
2524 On some machines, the definition
2525
2526 @example
2527 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (BYTES)
2528 @end example
2529
2530 @noindent
2531 will suffice. But on other machines, instructions that appear
2532 to push one byte actually push two bytes in an attempt to maintain
2533 alignment. Then the definition should be
2534
2535 @example
2536 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (((BYTES) + 1) & ~1)
2537 @end example
2538
2539 @findex ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
2540 @findex current_function_outgoing_args_size
2541 @item ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
2542 If defined, the maximum amount of space required for outgoing arguments
2543 will be computed and placed into the variable
2544 @code{current_function_outgoing_args_size}. No space will be pushed
2545 onto the stack for each call; instead, the function prologue should
2546 increase the stack frame size by this amount.
2547
2548 Defining both @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} and @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS}
2549 is not proper.
2550
2551 @findex REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2552 @item REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
2553 Define this macro if functions should assume that stack space has been
2554 allocated for arguments even when their values are passed in
2555 registers.
2556
2557 The value of this macro is the size, in bytes, of the area reserved for
2558 arguments passed in registers for the function represented by @var{fndecl}.
2559
2560 This space can be allocated by the caller, or be a part of the
2561 machine-dependent stack frame: @code{OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} says
2562 which.
2563 @c above is overfull. not sure what to do. --mew 5feb93 did
2564 @c something, not sure if it looks good. --mew 10feb93
2565
2566 @findex MAYBE_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2567 @findex FINAL_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2568 @item MAYBE_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2569 @itemx FINAL_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{const_size}, @var{var_size})
2570 Define these macros in addition to the one above if functions might
2571 allocate stack space for arguments even when their values are passed
2572 in registers. These should be used when the stack space allocated
2573 for arguments in registers is not a simple constant independent of the
2574 function declaration.
2575
2576 The value of the first macro is the size, in bytes, of the area that
2577 we should initially assume would be reserved for arguments passed in registers.
2578
2579 The value of the second macro is the actual size, in bytes, of the area
2580 that will be reserved for arguments passed in registers. This takes two
2581 arguments: an integer representing the number of bytes of fixed sized
2582 arguments on the stack, and a tree representing the number of bytes of
2583 variable sized arguments on the stack.
2584
2585 When these macros are defined, @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} will only be
2586 called for libcall functions, the current function, or for a function
2587 being called when it is known that such stack space must be allocated.
2588 In each case this value can be easily computed.
2589
2590 When deciding whether a called function needs such stack space, and how
2591 much space to reserve, GNU CC uses these two macros instead of
2592 @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}.
2593
2594 @findex OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2595 @item OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2596 Define this if it is the responsibility of the caller to allocate the area
2597 reserved for arguments passed in registers.
2598
2599 If @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, this macro controls
2600 whether the space for these arguments counts in the value of
2601 @code{current_function_outgoing_args_size}.
2602
2603 @findex STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
2604 @item STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
2605 Define this macro if @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is defined, but the
2606 stack parameters don't skip the area specified by it.
2607 @c i changed this, makes more sens and it should have taken care of the
2608 @c overfull.. not as specific, tho. --mew 5feb93
2609
2610 Normally, when a parameter is not passed in registers, it is placed on the
2611 stack beyond the @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} area. Defining this macro
2612 suppresses this behavior and causes the parameter to be passed on the
2613 stack in its natural location.
2614
2615 @findex RETURN_POPS_ARGS
2616 @item RETURN_POPS_ARGS (@var{fundecl}, @var{funtype}, @var{stack-size})
2617 A C expression that should indicate the number of bytes of its own
2618 arguments that a function pops on returning, or 0 if the
2619 function pops no arguments and the caller must therefore pop them all
2620 after the function returns.
2621
2622 @var{fundecl} is a C variable whose value is a tree node that describes
2623 the function in question. Normally it is a node of type
2624 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} that describes the declaration of the function.
2625 From this you can obtain the DECL_MACHINE_ATTRIBUTES of the function.
2626
2627 @var{funtype} is a C variable whose value is a tree node that
2628 describes the function in question. Normally it is a node of type
2629 @code{FUNCTION_TYPE} that describes the data type of the function.
2630 From this it is possible to obtain the data types of the value and
2631 arguments (if known).
2632
2633 When a call to a library function is being considered, @var{fundecl}
2634 will contain an identifier node for the library function. Thus, if
2635 you need to distinguish among various library functions, you can do so
2636 by their names. Note that ``library function'' in this context means
2637 a function used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known specially
2638 in the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being compiled.
2639
2640 @var{stack-size} is the number of bytes of arguments passed on the
2641 stack. If a variable number of bytes is passed, it is zero, and
2642 argument popping will always be the responsibility of the calling function.
2643
2644 On the Vax, all functions always pop their arguments, so the definition
2645 of this macro is @var{stack-size}. On the 68000, using the standard
2646 calling convention, no functions pop their arguments, so the value of
2647 the macro is always 0 in this case. But an alternative calling
2648 convention is available in which functions that take a fixed number of
2649 arguments pop them but other functions (such as @code{printf}) pop
2650 nothing (the caller pops all). When this convention is in use,
2651 @var{funtype} is examined to determine whether a function takes a fixed
2652 number of arguments.
2653 @end table
2654
2655 @node Register Arguments
2656 @subsection Passing Arguments in Registers
2657 @cindex arguments in registers
2658 @cindex registers arguments
2659
2660 This section describes the macros which let you control how various
2661 types of arguments are passed in registers or how they are arranged in
2662 the stack.
2663
2664 @table @code
2665 @findex FUNCTION_ARG
2666 @item FUNCTION_ARG (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2667 A C expression that controls whether a function argument is passed
2668 in a register, and which register.
2669
2670 The arguments are @var{cum}, which summarizes all the previous
2671 arguments; @var{mode}, the machine mode of the argument; @var{type},
2672 the data type of the argument as a tree node or 0 if that is not known
2673 (which happens for C support library functions); and @var{named},
2674 which is 1 for an ordinary argument and 0 for nameless arguments that
2675 correspond to @samp{@dots{}} in the called function's prototype.
2676
2677 The value of the expression is usually either a @code{reg} RTX for the
2678 hard register in which to pass the argument, or zero to pass the
2679 argument on the stack.
2680
2681 For machines like the Vax and 68000, where normally all arguments are
2682 pushed, zero suffices as a definition.
2683
2684 The value of the expression can also be a @code{parallel} RTX. This is
2685 used when an argument is passed in multiple locations. The mode of the
2686 of the @code{parallel} should be the mode of the entire argument. The
2687 @code{parallel} holds any number of @code{expr_list} pairs; each one
2688 describes where part of the argument is passed. In each @code{expr_list},
2689 the first operand can be either a @code{reg} RTX for the hard register
2690 in which to pass this part of the argument, or zero to pass the argument
2691 on the stack. If this operand is a @code{reg}, then the mode indicates
2692 how large this part of the argument is. The second operand of the
2693 @code{expr_list} is a @code{const_int} which gives the offset in bytes
2694 into the entire argument where this part starts.
2695
2696 @cindex @file{stdarg.h} and register arguments
2697 The usual way to make the ANSI library @file{stdarg.h} work on a machine
2698 where some arguments are usually passed in registers, is to cause
2699 nameless arguments to be passed on the stack instead. This is done
2700 by making @code{FUNCTION_ARG} return 0 whenever @var{named} is 0.
2701
2702 @cindex @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK}, and @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
2703 @cindex @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}, and @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
2704 You may use the macro @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (@var{mode}, @var{type})}
2705 in the definition of this macro to determine if this argument is of a
2706 type that must be passed in the stack. If @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}
2707 is not defined and @code{FUNCTION_ARG} returns non-zero for such an
2708 argument, the compiler will abort. If @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is
2709 defined, the argument will be computed in the stack and then loaded into
2710 a register.
2711
2712 @findex MUST_PASS_IN_STACK
2713 @item MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (@var{mode}, @var{type})
2714 Define as a C expression that evaluates to nonzero if we do not know how
2715 to pass TYPE solely in registers. The file @file{expr.h} defines a
2716 definition that is usually appropriate, refer to @file{expr.h} for additional
2717 documentation.
2718
2719 @findex FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG
2720 @item FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2721 Define this macro if the target machine has ``register windows'', so
2722 that the register in which a function sees an arguments is not
2723 necessarily the same as the one in which the caller passed the
2724 argument.
2725
2726 For such machines, @code{FUNCTION_ARG} computes the register in which
2727 the caller passes the value, and @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG} should
2728 be defined in a similar fashion to tell the function being called
2729 where the arguments will arrive.
2730
2731 If @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG} is not defined, @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
2732 serves both purposes.@refill
2733
2734 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS
2735 @item FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2736 A C expression for the number of words, at the beginning of an
2737 argument, must be put in registers. The value must be zero for
2738 arguments that are passed entirely in registers or that are entirely
2739 pushed on the stack.
2740
2741 On some machines, certain arguments must be passed partially in
2742 registers and partially in memory. On these machines, typically the
2743 first @var{n} words of arguments are passed in registers, and the rest
2744 on the stack. If a multi-word argument (a @code{double} or a
2745 structure) crosses that boundary, its first few words must be passed
2746 in registers and the rest must be pushed. This macro tells the
2747 compiler when this occurs, and how many of the words should go in
2748 registers.
2749
2750 @code{FUNCTION_ARG} for these arguments should return the first
2751 register to be used by the caller for this argument; likewise
2752 @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG}, for the called function.
2753
2754 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
2755 @item FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2756 A C expression that indicates when an argument must be passed by reference.
2757 If nonzero for an argument, a copy of that argument is made in memory and a
2758 pointer to the argument is passed instead of the argument itself.
2759 The pointer is passed in whatever way is appropriate for passing a pointer
2760 to that type.
2761
2762 On machines where @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is not defined, a suitable
2763 definition of this macro might be
2764 @smallexample
2765 #define FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE\
2766 (CUM, MODE, TYPE, NAMED) \
2767 MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (MODE, TYPE)
2768 @end smallexample
2769 @c this is *still* too long. --mew 5feb93
2770
2771 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES
2772 @item FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2773 If defined, a C expression that indicates when it is the called function's
2774 responsibility to make a copy of arguments passed by invisible reference.
2775 Normally, the caller makes a copy and passes the address of the copy to the
2776 routine being called. When FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES is defined and is
2777 nonzero, the caller does not make a copy. Instead, it passes a pointer to the
2778 ``live'' value. The called function must not modify this value. If it can be
2779 determined that the value won't be modified, it need not make a copy;
2780 otherwise a copy must be made.
2781
2782 @findex CUMULATIVE_ARGS
2783 @item CUMULATIVE_ARGS
2784 A C type for declaring a variable that is used as the first argument of
2785 @code{FUNCTION_ARG} and other related values. For some target machines,
2786 the type @code{int} suffices and can hold the number of bytes of
2787 argument so far.
2788
2789 There is no need to record in @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} anything about the
2790 arguments that have been passed on the stack. The compiler has other
2791 variables to keep track of that. For target machines on which all
2792 arguments are passed on the stack, there is no need to store anything in
2793 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}; however, the data structure must exist and
2794 should not be empty, so use @code{int}.
2795
2796 @findex INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS
2797 @item INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname}, @var{indirect})
2798 A C statement (sans semicolon) for initializing the variable @var{cum}
2799 for the state at the beginning of the argument list. The variable has
2800 type @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}. The value of @var{fntype} is the tree node
2801 for the data type of the function which will receive the args, or 0
2802 if the args are to a compiler support library function. The value of
2803 @var{indirect} is nonzero when processing an indirect call, for example
2804 a call through a function pointer. The value of @var{indirect} is zero
2805 for a call to an explicitly named function, a library function call, or when
2806 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used to find arguments for the function
2807 being compiled.
2808
2809 When processing a call to a compiler support library function,
2810 @var{libname} identifies which one. It is a @code{symbol_ref} rtx which
2811 contains the name of the function, as a string. @var{libname} is 0 when
2812 an ordinary C function call is being processed. Thus, each time this
2813 macro is called, either @var{libname} or @var{fntype} is nonzero, but
2814 never both of them at once.
2815
2816 @findex INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS
2817 @item INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname})
2818 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but overrides it for the purposes of
2819 finding the arguments for the function being compiled. If this macro is
2820 undefined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used instead.
2821
2822 The value passed for @var{libname} is always 0, since library routines
2823 with special calling conventions are never compiled with GNU CC. The
2824 argument @var{libname} exists for symmetry with
2825 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.
2826 @c could use "this macro" in place of @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}, maybe.
2827 @c --mew 5feb93 i switched the order of the sentences. --mew 10feb93
2828
2829 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE
2830 @item FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2831 A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the summarizer variable
2832 @var{cum} to advance past an argument in the argument list. The
2833 values @var{mode}, @var{type} and @var{named} describe that argument.
2834 Once this is done, the variable @var{cum} is suitable for analyzing
2835 the @emph{following} argument with @code{FUNCTION_ARG}, etc.@refill
2836
2837 This macro need not do anything if the argument in question was passed
2838 on the stack. The compiler knows how to track the amount of stack space
2839 used for arguments without any special help.
2840
2841 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING
2842 @item FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type})
2843 If defined, a C expression which determines whether, and in which direction,
2844 to pad out an argument with extra space. The value should be of type
2845 @code{enum direction}: either @code{upward} to pad above the argument,
2846 @code{downward} to pad below, or @code{none} to inhibit padding.
2847
2848 The @emph{amount} of padding is always just enough to reach the next
2849 multiple of @code{FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY}; this macro does not control
2850 it.
2851
2852 This macro has a default definition which is right for most systems.
2853 For little-endian machines, the default is to pad upward. For
2854 big-endian machines, the default is to pad downward for an argument of
2855 constant size shorter than an @code{int}, and upward otherwise.
2856
2857 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY
2858 @item FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY (@var{mode}, @var{type})
2859 If defined, a C expression that gives the alignment boundary, in bits,
2860 of an argument with the specified mode and type. If it is not defined,
2861 @code{PARM_BOUNDARY} is used for all arguments.
2862
2863 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P
2864 @item FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
2865 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
2866 register in which function arguments are sometimes passed. This does
2867 @emph{not} include implicit arguments such as the static chain and
2868 the structure-value address. On many machines, no registers can be
2869 used for this purpose since all function arguments are pushed on the
2870 stack.
2871
2872 @findex LOAD_ARGS_REVERSED
2873 @item LOAD_ARGS_REVERSED
2874 If defined, the order in which arguments are loaded into their
2875 respective argument registers is reversed so that the last
2876 argument is loaded first. This macro only effects arguments
2877 passed in registers.
2878
2879 @end table
2880
2881 @node Scalar Return
2882 @subsection How Scalar Function Values Are Returned
2883 @cindex return values in registers
2884 @cindex values, returned by functions
2885 @cindex scalars, returned as values
2886
2887 This section discusses the macros that control returning scalars as
2888 values---values that can fit in registers.
2889
2890 @table @code
2891 @findex TRADITIONAL_RETURN_FLOAT
2892 @item TRADITIONAL_RETURN_FLOAT
2893 Define this macro if @samp{-traditional} should not cause functions
2894 declared to return @code{float} to convert the value to @code{double}.
2895
2896 @findex FUNCTION_VALUE
2897 @item FUNCTION_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
2898 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a
2899 function returns a value of data type @var{valtype}. @var{valtype} is
2900 a tree node representing a data type. Write @code{TYPE_MODE
2901 (@var{valtype})} to get the machine mode used to represent that type.
2902 On many machines, only the mode is relevant. (Actually, on most
2903 machines, scalar values are returned in the same place regardless of
2904 mode).@refill
2905
2906 The value of the expression is usually a @code{reg} RTX for the hard
2907 register where the return value is stored. The value can also be a
2908 @code{parallel} RTX, if the return value is in multiple places. See
2909 @code{FUNCTION_ARG} for an explanation of the @code{parallel} form.
2910
2911 If @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN} is defined, you must apply the same
2912 promotion rules specified in @code{PROMOTE_MODE} if @var{valtype} is a
2913 scalar type.
2914
2915 If the precise function being called is known, @var{func} is a tree
2916 node (@code{FUNCTION_DECL}) for it; otherwise, @var{func} is a null
2917 pointer. This makes it possible to use a different value-returning
2918 convention for specific functions when all their calls are
2919 known.@refill
2920
2921 @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} is not used for return vales with aggregate data
2922 types, because these are returned in another way. See
2923 @code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} and related macros, below.
2924
2925 @findex FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE
2926 @item FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
2927 Define this macro if the target machine has ``register windows''
2928 so that the register in which a function returns its value is not
2929 the same as the one in which the caller sees the value.
2930
2931 For such machines, @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} computes the register in which
2932 the caller will see the value. @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} should be
2933 defined in a similar fashion to tell the function where to put the
2934 value.@refill
2935
2936 If @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} is not defined,
2937 @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} serves both purposes.@refill
2938
2939 @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} is not used for return vales with
2940 aggregate data types, because these are returned in another way. See
2941 @code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} and related macros, below.
2942
2943 @findex LIBCALL_VALUE
2944 @item LIBCALL_VALUE (@var{mode})
2945 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a library
2946 function returns a value of mode @var{mode}. If the precise function
2947 being called is known, @var{func} is a tree node
2948 (@code{FUNCTION_DECL}) for it; otherwise, @var{func} is a null
2949 pointer. This makes it possible to use a different value-returning
2950 convention for specific functions when all their calls are
2951 known.@refill
2952
2953 Note that ``library function'' in this context means a compiler
2954 support routine, used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known
2955 specially by the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being
2956 compiled.
2957
2958 The definition of @code{LIBRARY_VALUE} need not be concerned aggregate
2959 data types, because none of the library functions returns such types.
2960
2961 @findex FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P
2962 @item FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
2963 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
2964 register in which the values of called function may come back.
2965
2966 A register whose use for returning values is limited to serving as the
2967 second of a pair (for a value of type @code{double}, say) need not be
2968 recognized by this macro. So for most machines, this definition
2969 suffices:
2970
2971 @example
2972 #define FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P(N) ((N) == 0)
2973 @end example
2974
2975 If the machine has register windows, so that the caller and the called
2976 function use different registers for the return value, this macro
2977 should recognize only the caller's register numbers.
2978
2979 @findex APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
2980 @item APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
2981 Define this macro if @samp{untyped_call} and @samp{untyped_return}
2982 need more space than is implied by @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} for
2983 saving and restoring an arbitrary return value.
2984 @end table
2985
2986 @node Aggregate Return
2987 @subsection How Large Values Are Returned
2988 @cindex aggregates as return values
2989 @cindex large return values
2990 @cindex returning aggregate values
2991 @cindex structure value address
2992
2993 When a function value's mode is @code{BLKmode} (and in some other
2994 cases), the value is not returned according to @code{FUNCTION_VALUE}
2995 (@pxref{Scalar Return}). Instead, the caller passes the address of a
2996 block of memory in which the value should be stored. This address
2997 is called the @dfn{structure value address}.
2998
2999 This section describes how to control returning structure values in
3000 memory.
3001
3002 @table @code
3003 @findex RETURN_IN_MEMORY
3004 @item RETURN_IN_MEMORY (@var{type})
3005 A C expression which can inhibit the returning of certain function
3006 values in registers, based on the type of value. A nonzero value says
3007 to return the function value in memory, just as large structures are
3008 always returned. Here @var{type} will be a C expression of type
3009 @code{tree}, representing the data type of the value.
3010
3011 Note that values of mode @code{BLKmode} must be explicitly handled
3012 by this macro. Also, the option @samp{-fpcc-struct-return}
3013 takes effect regardless of this macro. On most systems, it is
3014 possible to leave the macro undefined; this causes a default
3015 definition to be used, whose value is the constant 1 for @code{BLKmode}
3016 values, and 0 otherwise.
3017
3018 Do not use this macro to indicate that structures and unions should always
3019 be returned in memory. You should instead use @code{DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN}
3020 to indicate this.
3021
3022 @findex DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3023 @item DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3024 Define this macro to be 1 if all structure and union return values must be
3025 in memory. Since this results in slower code, this should be defined
3026 only if needed for compatibility with other compilers or with an ABI.
3027 If you define this macro to be 0, then the conventions used for structure
3028 and union return values are decided by the @code{RETURN_IN_MEMORY} macro.
3029
3030 If not defined, this defaults to the value 1.
3031
3032 @findex STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM
3033 @item STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM
3034 If the structure value address is passed in a register, then
3035 @code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} should be the number of that register.
3036
3037 @findex STRUCT_VALUE
3038 @item STRUCT_VALUE
3039 If the structure value address is not passed in a register, define
3040 @code{STRUCT_VALUE} as an expression returning an RTX for the place
3041 where the address is passed. If it returns 0, the address is passed as
3042 an ``invisible'' first argument.
3043
3044 @findex STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING_REGNUM
3045 @item STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING_REGNUM
3046 On some architectures the place where the structure value address
3047 is found by the called function is not the same place that the
3048 caller put it. This can be due to register windows, or it could
3049 be because the function prologue moves it to a different place.
3050
3051 If the incoming location of the structure value address is in a
3052 register, define this macro as the register number.
3053
3054 @findex STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING
3055 @item STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING
3056 If the incoming location is not a register, then you should define
3057 @code{STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING} as an expression for an RTX for where the
3058 called function should find the value. If it should find the value on
3059 the stack, define this to create a @code{mem} which refers to the frame
3060 pointer. A definition of 0 means that the address is passed as an
3061 ``invisible'' first argument.
3062
3063 @findex PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3064 @item PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3065 Define this macro if the usual system convention on the target machine
3066 for returning structures and unions is for the called function to return
3067 the address of a static variable containing the value.
3068
3069 Do not define this if the usual system convention is for the caller to
3070 pass an address to the subroutine.
3071
3072 This macro has effect in @samp{-fpcc-struct-return} mode, but it does
3073 nothing when you use @samp{-freg-struct-return} mode.
3074 @end table
3075
3076 @node Caller Saves
3077 @subsection Caller-Saves Register Allocation
3078
3079 If you enable it, GNU CC can save registers around function calls. This
3080 makes it possible to use call-clobbered registers to hold variables that
3081 must live across calls.
3082
3083 @table @code
3084 @findex DEFAULT_CALLER_SAVES
3085 @item DEFAULT_CALLER_SAVES
3086 Define this macro if function calls on the target machine do not preserve
3087 any registers; in other words, if @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} has 1
3088 for all registers. This macro enables @samp{-fcaller-saves} by default.
3089 Eventually that option will be enabled by default on all machines and both
3090 the option and this macro will be eliminated.
3091
3092 @findex CALLER_SAVE_PROFITABLE
3093 @item CALLER_SAVE_PROFITABLE (@var{refs}, @var{calls})
3094 A C expression to determine whether it is worthwhile to consider placing
3095 a pseudo-register in a call-clobbered hard register and saving and
3096 restoring it around each function call. The expression should be 1 when
3097 this is worth doing, and 0 otherwise.
3098
3099 If you don't define this macro, a default is used which is good on most
3100 machines: @code{4 * @var{calls} < @var{refs}}.
3101 @end table
3102
3103 @node Function Entry
3104 @subsection Function Entry and Exit
3105 @cindex function entry and exit
3106 @cindex prologue
3107 @cindex epilogue
3108
3109 This section describes the macros that output function entry
3110 (@dfn{prologue}) and exit (@dfn{epilogue}) code.
3111
3112 @table @code
3113 @findex FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
3114 @item FUNCTION_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{size})
3115 A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for entry to a
3116 function. The prologue is responsible for setting up the stack frame,
3117 initializing the frame pointer register, saving registers that must be
3118 saved, and allocating @var{size} additional bytes of storage for the
3119 local variables. @var{size} is an integer. @var{file} is a stdio
3120 stream to which the assembler code should be output.
3121
3122 The label for the beginning of the function need not be output by this
3123 macro. That has already been done when the macro is run.
3124
3125 @findex regs_ever_live
3126 To determine which registers to save, the macro can refer to the array
3127 @code{regs_ever_live}: element @var{r} is nonzero if hard register
3128 @var{r} is used anywhere within the function. This implies the function
3129 prologue should save register @var{r}, provided it is not one of the
3130 call-used registers. (@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must likewise use
3131 @code{regs_ever_live}.)
3132
3133 On machines that have ``register windows'', the function entry code does
3134 not save on the stack the registers that are in the windows, even if
3135 they are supposed to be preserved by function calls; instead it takes
3136 appropriate steps to ``push'' the register stack, if any non-call-used
3137 registers are used in the function.
3138
3139 @findex frame_pointer_needed
3140 On machines where functions may or may not have frame-pointers, the
3141 function entry code must vary accordingly; it must set up the frame
3142 pointer if one is wanted, and not otherwise. To determine whether a
3143 frame pointer is in wanted, the macro can refer to the variable
3144 @code{frame_pointer_needed}. The variable's value will be 1 at run
3145 time in a function that needs a frame pointer. @xref{Elimination}.
3146
3147 The function entry code is responsible for allocating any stack space
3148 required for the function. This stack space consists of the regions
3149 listed below. In most cases, these regions are allocated in the
3150 order listed, with the last listed region closest to the top of the
3151 stack (the lowest address if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is defined, and
3152 the highest address if it is not defined). You can use a different order
3153 for a machine if doing so is more convenient or required for
3154 compatibility reasons. Except in cases where required by standard
3155 or by a debugger, there is no reason why the stack layout used by GCC
3156 need agree with that used by other compilers for a machine.
3157
3158 @itemize @bullet
3159 @item
3160 @findex current_function_pretend_args_size
3161 A region of @code{current_function_pretend_args_size} bytes of
3162 uninitialized space just underneath the first argument arriving on the
3163 stack. (This may not be at the very start of the allocated stack region
3164 if the calling sequence has pushed anything else since pushing the stack
3165 arguments. But usually, on such machines, nothing else has been pushed
3166 yet, because the function prologue itself does all the pushing.) This
3167 region is used on machines where an argument may be passed partly in
3168 registers and partly in memory, and, in some cases to support the
3169 features in @file{varargs.h} and @file{stdargs.h}.
3170
3171 @item
3172 An area of memory used to save certain registers used by the function.
3173 The size of this area, which may also include space for such things as
3174 the return address and pointers to previous stack frames, is
3175 machine-specific and usually depends on which registers have been used
3176 in the function. Machines with register windows often do not require
3177 a save area.
3178
3179 @item
3180 A region of at least @var{size} bytes, possibly rounded up to an allocation
3181 boundary, to contain the local variables of the function. On some machines,
3182 this region and the save area may occur in the opposite order, with the
3183 save area closer to the top of the stack.
3184
3185 @item
3186 @cindex @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} and stack frames
3187 Optionally, when @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, a region of
3188 @code{current_function_outgoing_args_size} bytes to be used for outgoing
3189 argument lists of the function. @xref{Stack Arguments}.
3190 @end itemize
3191
3192 Normally, it is necessary for the macros @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
3193 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to treat leaf functions specially. The C
3194 variable @code{leaf_function} is nonzero for such a function.
3195
3196 @findex EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3197 @item EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3198 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if the return
3199 instruction or the function epilogue ignores the value of the stack
3200 pointer; in other words, if it is safe to delete an instruction to
3201 adjust the stack pointer before a return from the function.
3202
3203 Note that this macro's value is relevant only for functions for which
3204 frame pointers are maintained. It is never safe to delete a final
3205 stack adjustment in a function that has no frame pointer, and the
3206 compiler knows this regardless of @code{EXIT_IGNORE_STACK}.
3207
3208 @findex EPILOGUE_USES
3209 @item EPILOGUE_USES (@var{regno})
3210 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers are
3211 used by the epilogue or the @samp{return} pattern. The stack and frame
3212 pointer registers are already be assumed to be used as needed.
3213
3214 @findex FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
3215 @item FUNCTION_EPILOGUE (@var{file}, @var{size})
3216 A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for exit from a
3217 function. The epilogue is responsible for restoring the saved
3218 registers and stack pointer to their values when the function was
3219 called, and returning control to the caller. This macro takes the
3220 same arguments as the macro @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE}, and the
3221 registers to restore are determined from @code{regs_ever_live} and
3222 @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} in the same way.
3223
3224 On some machines, there is a single instruction that does all the work
3225 of returning from the function. On these machines, give that
3226 instruction the name @samp{return} and do not define the macro
3227 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} at all.
3228
3229 Do not define a pattern named @samp{return} if you want the
3230 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to be used. If you want the target switches
3231 to control whether return instructions or epilogues are used, define a
3232 @samp{return} pattern with a validity condition that tests the target
3233 switches appropriately. If the @samp{return} pattern's validity
3234 condition is false, epilogues will be used.
3235
3236 On machines where functions may or may not have frame-pointers, the
3237 function exit code must vary accordingly. Sometimes the code for these
3238 two cases is completely different. To determine whether a frame pointer
3239 is wanted, the macro can refer to the variable
3240 @code{frame_pointer_needed}. The variable's value will be 1 when compiling
3241 a function that needs a frame pointer.
3242
3243 Normally, @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must
3244 treat leaf functions specially. The C variable @code{leaf_function} is
3245 nonzero for such a function. @xref{Leaf Functions}.
3246
3247 On some machines, some functions pop their arguments on exit while
3248 others leave that for the caller to do. For example, the 68020 when
3249 given @samp{-mrtd} pops arguments in functions that take a fixed
3250 number of arguments.
3251
3252 @findex current_function_pops_args
3253 Your definition of the macro @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} decides which
3254 functions pop their own arguments. @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} needs to
3255 know what was decided. The variable that is called
3256 @code{current_function_pops_args} is the number of bytes of its
3257 arguments that a function should pop. @xref{Scalar Return}.
3258 @c what is the "its arguments" in the above sentence referring to, pray
3259 @c tell? --mew 5feb93
3260
3261 @findex DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE
3262 @item DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE
3263 Define this macro if the function epilogue contains delay slots to which
3264 instructions from the rest of the function can be ``moved''. The
3265 definition should be a C expression whose value is an integer
3266 representing the number of delay slots there.
3267
3268 @findex ELIGIBLE_FOR_EPILOGUE_DELAY
3269 @item ELIGIBLE_FOR_EPILOGUE_DELAY (@var{insn}, @var{n})
3270 A C expression that returns 1 if @var{insn} can be placed in delay
3271 slot number @var{n} of the epilogue.
3272
3273 The argument @var{n} is an integer which identifies the delay slot now
3274 being considered (since different slots may have different rules of
3275 eligibility). It is never negative and is always less than the number
3276 of epilogue delay slots (what @code{DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE} returns).
3277 If you reject a particular insn for a given delay slot, in principle, it
3278 may be reconsidered for a subsequent delay slot. Also, other insns may
3279 (at least in principle) be considered for the so far unfilled delay
3280 slot.
3281
3282 @findex current_function_epilogue_delay_list
3283 @findex final_scan_insn
3284 The insns accepted to fill the epilogue delay slots are put in an RTL
3285 list made with @code{insn_list} objects, stored in the variable
3286 @code{current_function_epilogue_delay_list}. The insn for the first
3287 delay slot comes first in the list. Your definition of the macro
3288 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} should fill the delay slots by outputting the
3289 insns in this list, usually by calling @code{final_scan_insn}.
3290
3291 You need not define this macro if you did not define
3292 @code{DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE}.
3293
3294 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3295 @item ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK (@var{file}, @var{thunk_fndecl}, @var{delta}, @var{function})
3296 A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for a thunk
3297 function, used to implement C++ virtual function calls with multiple
3298 inheritance. The thunk acts as a wrapper around a virtual function,
3299 adjusting the implicit object parameter before handing control off to
3300 the real function.
3301
3302 First, emit code to add the integer @var{delta} to the location that
3303 contains the incoming first argument. Assume that this argument
3304 contains a pointer, and is the one used to pass the @code{this} pointer
3305 in C++. This is the incoming argument @emph{before} the function prologue,
3306 e.g. @samp{%o0} on a sparc. The addition must preserve the values of
3307 all other incoming arguments.
3308
3309 After the addition, emit code to jump to @var{function}, which is a
3310 @code{FUNCTION_DECL}. This is a direct pure jump, not a call, and does
3311 not touch the return address. Hence returning from @var{FUNCTION} will
3312 return to whoever called the current @samp{thunk}.
3313
3314 The effect must be as if @var{function} had been called directly with
3315 the adjusted first argument. This macro is responsible for emitting all
3316 of the code for a thunk function; @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
3317 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} are not invoked.
3318
3319 The @var{thunk_fndecl} is redundant. (@var{delta} and @var{function}
3320 have already been extracted from it.) It might possibly be useful on
3321 some targets, but probably not.
3322
3323 If you do not define this macro, the target-independent code in the C++
3324 frontend will generate a less efficient heavyweight thunk that calls
3325 @var{function} instead of jumping to it. The generic approach does
3326 not support varargs.
3327 @end table
3328
3329 @node Profiling
3330 @subsection Generating Code for Profiling
3331 @cindex profiling, code generation
3332
3333 These macros will help you generate code for profiling.
3334
3335 @table @code
3336 @findex FUNCTION_PROFILER
3337 @item FUNCTION_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3338 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3339 assembler code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount}.
3340 Before calling, the assembler code must load the address of a
3341 counter variable into a register where @code{mcount} expects to
3342 find the address. The name of this variable is @samp{LP} followed
3343 by the number @var{labelno}, so you would generate the name using
3344 @samp{LP%d} in a @code{fprintf}.
3345
3346 @findex mcount
3347 The details of how the address should be passed to @code{mcount} are
3348 determined by your operating system environment, not by GNU CC. To
3349 figure them out, compile a small program for profiling using the
3350 system's installed C compiler and look at the assembler code that
3351 results.
3352
3353 @findex PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3354 @item PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3355 Define this macro if the code for function profiling should come before
3356 the function prologue. Normally, the profiling code comes after.
3357
3358 @findex FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER
3359 @vindex profile_block_flag
3360 @item FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3361 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3362 assembler code to initialize basic-block profiling for the current
3363 object module. The global compile flag @code{profile_block_flag}
3364 distinguishes two profile modes.
3365
3366 @table @code
3367 @findex __bb_init_func
3368 @item profile_block_flag != 2
3369 Output code to call the subroutine @code{__bb_init_func} once per
3370 object module, passing it as its sole argument the address of a block
3371 allocated in the object module.
3372
3373 The name of the block is a local symbol made with this statement:
3374
3375 @smallexample
3376 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 0);
3377 @end smallexample
3378
3379 Of course, since you are writing the definition of
3380 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} as well as that of this macro, you
3381 can take a short cut in the definition of this macro and use the name
3382 that you know will result.
3383
3384 The first word of this block is a flag which will be nonzero if the
3385 object module has already been initialized. So test this word first,
3386 and do not call @code{__bb_init_func} if the flag is
3387 nonzero. BLOCK_OR_LABEL contains a unique number which may be used to
3388 generate a label as a branch destination when @code{__bb_init_func}
3389 will not be called.
3390
3391 Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3392
3393 @example
3394 cmp (LPBX0),0
3395 bne local_label
3396 parameter1 <- LPBX0
3397 call __bb_init_func
3398 local_label:
3399 @end example
3400
3401 @findex __bb_init_trace_func
3402 @item profile_block_flag == 2
3403 Output code to call the subroutine @code{__bb_init_trace_func}
3404 and pass two parameters to it. The first parameter is the same as
3405 for @code{__bb_init_func}. The second parameter is the number of the
3406 first basic block of the function as given by BLOCK_OR_LABEL. Note
3407 that @code{__bb_init_trace_func} has to be called, even if the object
3408 module has been initialized already.
3409
3410 Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3411 @example
3412 parameter1 <- LPBX0
3413 parameter2 <- BLOCK_OR_LABEL
3414 call __bb_init_trace_func
3415 @end example
3416 @end table
3417
3418 @findex BLOCK_PROFILER
3419 @vindex profile_block_flag
3420 @item BLOCK_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{blockno})
3421 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3422 assembler code to increment the count associated with the basic
3423 block number @var{blockno}. The global compile flag
3424 @code{profile_block_flag} distinguishes two profile modes.
3425
3426 @table @code
3427 @item profile_block_flag != 2
3428 Output code to increment the counter directly. Basic blocks are
3429 numbered separately from zero within each compilation. The count
3430 associated with block number @var{blockno} is at index
3431 @var{blockno} in a vector of words; the name of this array is a local
3432 symbol made with this statement:
3433
3434 @smallexample
3435 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 2);
3436 @end smallexample
3437
3438 @c This paragraph is the same as one a few paragraphs up.
3439 @c That is not an error.
3440 Of course, since you are writing the definition of
3441 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} as well as that of this macro, you
3442 can take a short cut in the definition of this macro and use the name
3443 that you know will result.
3444
3445 Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3446
3447 @smallexample
3448 inc (LPBX2+4*BLOCKNO)
3449 @end smallexample
3450
3451 @vindex __bb
3452 @findex __bb_trace_func
3453 @item profile_block_flag == 2
3454 Output code to initialize the global structure @code{__bb} and
3455 call the function @code{__bb_trace_func}, which will increment the
3456 counter.
3457
3458 @code{__bb} consists of two words. In the first word, the current
3459 basic block number, as given by BLOCKNO, has to be stored. In
3460 the second word, the address of a block allocated in the object
3461 module has to be stored. The address is given by the label created
3462 with this statement:
3463
3464 @smallexample
3465 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 0);
3466 @end smallexample
3467
3468 Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3469 @example
3470 move BLOCKNO -> (__bb)
3471 move LPBX0 -> (__bb+4)
3472 call __bb_trace_func
3473 @end example
3474 @end table
3475
3476 @findex FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT
3477 @findex __bb_trace_ret
3478 @vindex profile_block_flag
3479 @item FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT (@var{file})
3480 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file}
3481 assembler code to call function @code{__bb_trace_ret}. The
3482 assembler code should only be output
3483 if the global compile flag @code{profile_block_flag} == 2. This
3484 macro has to be used at every place where code for returning from
3485 a function is generated (e.g. @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}). Although
3486 you have to write the definition of @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}
3487 as well, you have to define this macro to tell the compiler, that
3488 the proper call to @code{__bb_trace_ret} is produced.
3489
3490 @findex MACHINE_STATE_SAVE
3491 @findex __bb_init_trace_func
3492 @findex __bb_trace_func
3493 @findex __bb_trace_ret
3494 @item MACHINE_STATE_SAVE (@var{id})
3495 A C statement or compound statement to save all registers, which may
3496 be clobbered by a function call, including condition codes. The
3497 @code{asm} statement will be mostly likely needed to handle this
3498 task. Local labels in the assembler code can be concatenated with the
3499 string @var{id}, to obtain a unique lable name.
3500
3501 Registers or condition codes clobbered by @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} or
3502 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must be saved in the macros
3503 @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER}, @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT} and
3504 @code{BLOCK_PROFILER} prior calling @code{__bb_init_trace_func},
3505 @code{__bb_trace_ret} and @code{__bb_trace_func} respectively.
3506
3507 @findex MACHINE_STATE_RESTORE
3508 @findex __bb_init_trace_func
3509 @findex __bb_trace_func
3510 @findex __bb_trace_ret
3511 @item MACHINE_STATE_RESTORE (@var{id})
3512 A C statement or compound statement to restore all registers, including
3513 condition codes, saved by @code{MACHINE_STATE_SAVE}.
3514
3515 Registers or condition codes clobbered by @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} or
3516 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must be restored in the macros
3517 @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER}, @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT} and
3518 @code{BLOCK_PROFILER} after calling @code{__bb_init_trace_func},
3519 @code{__bb_trace_ret} and @code{__bb_trace_func} respectively.
3520
3521 @findex BLOCK_PROFILER_CODE
3522 @item BLOCK_PROFILER_CODE
3523 A C function or functions which are needed in the library to
3524 support block profiling.
3525 @end table
3526
3527 @node Varargs
3528 @section Implementing the Varargs Macros
3529 @cindex varargs implementation
3530
3531 GNU CC comes with an implementation of @file{varargs.h} and
3532 @file{stdarg.h} that work without change on machines that pass arguments
3533 on the stack. Other machines require their own implementations of
3534 varargs, and the two machine independent header files must have
3535 conditionals to include it.
3536
3537 ANSI @file{stdarg.h} differs from traditional @file{varargs.h} mainly in
3538 the calling convention for @code{va_start}. The traditional
3539 implementation takes just one argument, which is the variable in which
3540 to store the argument pointer. The ANSI implementation of
3541 @code{va_start} takes an additional second argument. The user is
3542 supposed to write the last named argument of the function here.
3543
3544 However, @code{va_start} should not use this argument. The way to find
3545 the end of the named arguments is with the built-in functions described
3546 below.
3547
3548 @table @code
3549 @findex __builtin_saveregs
3550 @item __builtin_saveregs ()
3551 Use this built-in function to save the argument registers in memory so
3552 that the varargs mechanism can access them. Both ANSI and traditional
3553 versions of @code{va_start} must use @code{__builtin_saveregs}, unless
3554 you use @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} (see below) instead.
3555
3556 On some machines, @code{__builtin_saveregs} is open-coded under the
3557 control of the macro @code{EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. On other machines,
3558 it calls a routine written in assembler language, found in
3559 @file{libgcc2.c}.
3560
3561 Code generated for the call to @code{__builtin_saveregs} appears at the
3562 beginning of the function, as opposed to where the call to
3563 @code{__builtin_saveregs} is written, regardless of what the code is.
3564 This is because the registers must be saved before the function starts
3565 to use them for its own purposes.
3566 @c i rewrote the first sentence above to fix an overfull hbox. --mew
3567 @c 10feb93
3568
3569 @findex __builtin_args_info
3570 @item __builtin_args_info (@var{category})
3571 Use this built-in function to find the first anonymous arguments in
3572 registers.
3573
3574 In general, a machine may have several categories of registers used for
3575 arguments, each for a particular category of data types. (For example,
3576 on some machines, floating-point registers are used for floating-point
3577 arguments while other arguments are passed in the general registers.)
3578 To make non-varargs functions use the proper calling convention, you
3579 have defined the @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} data type to record how many
3580 registers in each category have been used so far
3581
3582 @code{__builtin_args_info} accesses the same data structure of type
3583 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} after the ordinary argument layout is finished
3584 with it, with @var{category} specifying which word to access. Thus, the
3585 value indicates the first unused register in a given category.
3586
3587 Normally, you would use @code{__builtin_args_info} in the implementation
3588 of @code{va_start}, accessing each category just once and storing the
3589 value in the @code{va_list} object. This is because @code{va_list} will
3590 have to update the values, and there is no way to alter the
3591 values accessed by @code{__builtin_args_info}.
3592
3593 @findex __builtin_next_arg
3594 @item __builtin_next_arg (@var{lastarg})
3595 This is the equivalent of @code{__builtin_args_info}, for stack
3596 arguments. It returns the address of the first anonymous stack
3597 argument, as type @code{void *}. If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, it
3598 returns the address of the location above the first anonymous stack
3599 argument. Use it in @code{va_start} to initialize the pointer for
3600 fetching arguments from the stack. Also use it in @code{va_start} to
3601 verify that the second parameter @var{lastarg} is the last named argument
3602 of the current function.
3603
3604 @findex __builtin_classify_type
3605 @item __builtin_classify_type (@var{object})
3606 Since each machine has its own conventions for which data types are
3607 passed in which kind of register, your implementation of @code{va_arg}
3608 has to embody these conventions. The easiest way to categorize the
3609 specified data type is to use @code{__builtin_classify_type} together
3610 with @code{sizeof} and @code{__alignof__}.
3611
3612 @code{__builtin_classify_type} ignores the value of @var{object},
3613 considering only its data type. It returns an integer describing what
3614 kind of type that is---integer, floating, pointer, structure, and so on.
3615
3616 The file @file{typeclass.h} defines an enumeration that you can use to
3617 interpret the values of @code{__builtin_classify_type}.
3618 @end table
3619
3620 These machine description macros help implement varargs:
3621
3622 @table @code
3623 @findex EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
3624 @item EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS (@var{args})
3625 If defined, is a C expression that produces the machine-specific code
3626 for a call to @code{__builtin_saveregs}. This code will be moved to the
3627 very beginning of the function, before any parameter access are made.
3628 The return value of this function should be an RTX that contains the
3629 value to use as the return of @code{__builtin_saveregs}.
3630
3631 The argument @var{args} is a @code{tree_list} containing the arguments
3632 that were passed to @code{__builtin_saveregs}.
3633
3634 If this macro is not defined, the compiler will output an ordinary
3635 call to the library function @samp{__builtin_saveregs}.
3636
3637 @c !!! a bug in texinfo; how to make the entry on the @item line allow
3638 @c more than one line of text... help... --mew 10feb93
3639 @findex SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS
3640 @item SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS (@var{args_so_far}, @var{mode}, @var{type},
3641 @var{pretend_args_size}, @var{second_time})
3642 This macro offers an alternative to using @code{__builtin_saveregs} and
3643 defining the macro @code{EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. Use it to store the
3644 anonymous register arguments into the stack so that all the arguments
3645 appear to have been passed consecutively on the stack. Once this is
3646 done, you can use the standard implementation of varargs that works for
3647 machines that pass all their arguments on the stack.
3648
3649 The argument @var{args_so_far} is the @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} data
3650 structure, containing the values that obtain after processing of the
3651 named arguments. The arguments @var{mode} and @var{type} describe the
3652 last named argument---its machine mode and its data type as a tree node.
3653
3654 The macro implementation should do two things: first, push onto the
3655 stack all the argument registers @emph{not} used for the named
3656 arguments, and second, store the size of the data thus pushed into the
3657 @code{int}-valued variable whose name is supplied as the argument
3658 @var{pretend_args_size}. The value that you store here will serve as
3659 additional offset for setting up the stack frame.
3660
3661 Because you must generate code to push the anonymous arguments at
3662 compile time without knowing their data types,
3663 @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} is only useful on machines that have just
3664 a single category of argument register and use it uniformly for all data
3665 types.
3666
3667 If the argument @var{second_time} is nonzero, it means that the
3668 arguments of the function are being analyzed for the second time. This
3669 happens for an inline function, which is not actually compiled until the
3670 end of the source file. The macro @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} should
3671 not generate any instructions in this case.
3672
3673 @findex STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3674 @item STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3675 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the location where a function
3676 argument is passed depends on whether or not it is a named argument.
3677
3678 This macro controls how the @var{named} argument to @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
3679 is set for varargs and stdarg functions. If this macro returns a
3680 nonzero value, the @var{named} argument is always true for named
3681 arguments, and false for unnamed arguments. If it returns a value of
3682 zero, but @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} is defined, then all arguments
3683 are treated as named. Otherwise, all named arguments except the last
3684 are treated as named.
3685
3686 You need not define this macro if it always returns zero.
3687 @end table
3688
3689 @node Trampolines
3690 @section Trampolines for Nested Functions
3691 @cindex trampolines for nested functions
3692 @cindex nested functions, trampolines for
3693
3694 A @dfn{trampoline} is a small piece of code that is created at run time
3695 when the address of a nested function is taken. It normally resides on
3696 the stack, in the stack frame of the containing function. These macros
3697 tell GNU CC how to generate code to allocate and initialize a
3698 trampoline.
3699
3700 The instructions in the trampoline must do two things: load a constant
3701 address into the static chain register, and jump to the real address of
3702 the nested function. On CISC machines such as the m68k, this requires
3703 two instructions, a move immediate and a jump. Then the two addresses
3704 exist in the trampoline as word-long immediate operands. On RISC
3705 machines, it is often necessary to load each address into a register in
3706 two parts. Then pieces of each address form separate immediate
3707 operands.
3708
3709 The code generated to initialize the trampoline must store the variable
3710 parts---the static chain value and the function address---into the
3711 immediate operands of the instructions. On a CISC machine, this is
3712 simply a matter of copying each address to a memory reference at the
3713 proper offset from the start of the trampoline. On a RISC machine, it
3714 may be necessary to take out pieces of the address and store them
3715 separately.
3716
3717 @table @code
3718 @findex TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE
3719 @item TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE (@var{file})
3720 A C statement to output, on the stream @var{file}, assembler code for a
3721 block of data that contains the constant parts of a trampoline. This
3722 code should not include a label---the label is taken care of
3723 automatically.
3724
3725 If you do not define this macro, it means no template is needed
3726 for the target. Do not define this macro on systems where the block move
3727 code to copy the trampoline into place would be larger than the code
3728 to generate it on the spot.
3729
3730 @findex TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3731 @item TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3732 The name of a subroutine to switch to the section in which the
3733 trampoline template is to be placed (@pxref{Sections}). The default is
3734 a value of @samp{readonly_data_section}, which places the trampoline in
3735 the section containing read-only data.
3736
3737 @findex TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3738 @item TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3739 A C expression for the size in bytes of the trampoline, as an integer.
3740
3741 @findex TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3742 @item TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3743 Alignment required for trampolines, in bits.
3744
3745 If you don't define this macro, the value of @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
3746 is used for aligning trampolines.
3747
3748 @findex INITIALIZE_TRAMPOLINE
3749 @item INITIALIZE_TRAMPOLINE (@var{addr}, @var{fnaddr}, @var{static_chain})
3750 A C statement to initialize the variable parts of a trampoline.
3751 @var{addr} is an RTX for the address of the trampoline; @var{fnaddr} is
3752 an RTX for the address of the nested function; @var{static_chain} is an
3753 RTX for the static chain value that should be passed to the function
3754 when it is called.
3755
3756 @findex ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE
3757 @item ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE (@var{fp})
3758 A C expression to allocate run-time space for a trampoline. The
3759 expression value should be an RTX representing a memory reference to the
3760 space for the trampoline.
3761
3762 @cindex @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} and trampolines
3763 @cindex @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and trampolines
3764 If this macro is not defined, by default the trampoline is allocated as
3765 a stack slot. This default is right for most machines. The exceptions
3766 are machines where it is impossible to execute instructions in the stack
3767 area. On such machines, you may have to implement a separate stack,
3768 using this macro in conjunction with @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
3769 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}.
3770
3771 @var{fp} points to a data structure, a @code{struct function}, which
3772 describes the compilation status of the immediate containing function of
3773 the function which the trampoline is for. Normally (when
3774 @code{ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE} is not defined), the stack slot for the
3775 trampoline is in the stack frame of this containing function. Other
3776 allocation strategies probably must do something analogous with this
3777 information.
3778 @end table
3779
3780 Implementing trampolines is difficult on many machines because they have
3781 separate instruction and data caches. Writing into a stack location
3782 fails to clear the memory in the instruction cache, so when the program
3783 jumps to that location, it executes the old contents.
3784
3785 Here are two possible solutions. One is to clear the relevant parts of
3786 the instruction cache whenever a trampoline is set up. The other is to
3787 make all trampolines identical, by having them jump to a standard
3788 subroutine. The former technique makes trampoline execution faster; the
3789 latter makes initialization faster.
3790
3791 To clear the instruction cache when a trampoline is initialized, define
3792 the following macros which describe the shape of the cache.
3793
3794 @table @code
3795 @findex INSN_CACHE_SIZE
3796 @item INSN_CACHE_SIZE
3797 The total size in bytes of the cache.
3798
3799 @findex INSN_CACHE_LINE_WIDTH
3800 @item INSN_CACHE_LINE_WIDTH
3801 The length in bytes of each cache line. The cache is divided into cache
3802 lines which are disjoint slots, each holding a contiguous chunk of data
3803 fetched from memory. Each time data is brought into the cache, an
3804 entire line is read at once. The data loaded into a cache line is
3805 always aligned on a boundary equal to the line size.
3806
3807 @findex INSN_CACHE_DEPTH
3808 @item INSN_CACHE_DEPTH
3809 The number of alternative cache lines that can hold any particular memory
3810 location.
3811 @end table
3812
3813 Alternatively, if the machine has system calls or instructions to clear
3814 the instruction cache directly, you can define the following macro.
3815
3816 @table @code
3817 @findex CLEAR_INSN_CACHE
3818 @item CLEAR_INSN_CACHE (@var{BEG}, @var{END})
3819 If defined, expands to a C expression clearing the @emph{instruction
3820 cache} in the specified interval. If it is not defined, and the macro
3821 INSN_CACHE_SIZE is defined, some generic code is generated to clear the
3822 cache. The definition of this macro would typically be a series of
3823 @code{asm} statements. Both @var{BEG} and @var{END} are both pointer
3824 expressions.
3825 @end table
3826
3827 To use a standard subroutine, define the following macro. In addition,
3828 you must make sure that the instructions in a trampoline fill an entire
3829 cache line with identical instructions, or else ensure that the
3830 beginning of the trampoline code is always aligned at the same point in
3831 its cache line. Look in @file{m68k.h} as a guide.
3832
3833 @table @code
3834 @findex TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
3835 @item TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
3836 Define this macro if trampolines need a special subroutine to do their
3837 work. The macro should expand to a series of @code{asm} statements
3838 which will be compiled with GNU CC. They go in a library function named
3839 @code{__transfer_from_trampoline}.
3840
3841 If you need to avoid executing the ordinary prologue code of a compiled
3842 C function when you jump to the subroutine, you can do so by placing a
3843 special label of your own in the assembler code. Use one @code{asm}
3844 statement to generate an assembler label, and another to make the label
3845 global. Then trampolines can use that label to jump directly to your
3846 special assembler code.
3847 @end table
3848
3849 @node Library Calls
3850 @section Implicit Calls to Library Routines
3851 @cindex library subroutine names
3852 @cindex @file{libgcc.a}
3853
3854 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3855 Here is an explanation of implicit calls to library routines.
3856
3857 @table @code
3858 @findex MULSI3_LIBCALL
3859 @item MULSI3_LIBCALL
3860 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3861 multiplication of one signed full-word by another. If you do not
3862 define this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__mulsi3},
3863 a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3864
3865 @findex DIVSI3_LIBCALL
3866 @item DIVSI3_LIBCALL
3867 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3868 division of one signed full-word by another. If you do not define
3869 this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__divsi3}, a
3870 function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3871
3872 @findex UDIVSI3_LIBCALL
3873 @item UDIVSI3_LIBCALL
3874 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3875 division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do not define
3876 this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__udivsi3}, a
3877 function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3878
3879 @findex MODSI3_LIBCALL
3880 @item MODSI3_LIBCALL
3881 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
3882 remainder in division of one signed full-word by another. If you do
3883 not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
3884 @code{__modsi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3885
3886 @findex UMODSI3_LIBCALL
3887 @item UMODSI3_LIBCALL
3888 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
3889 remainder in division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do
3890 not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
3891 @code{__umodsi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3892
3893 @findex MULDI3_LIBCALL
3894 @item MULDI3_LIBCALL
3895 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3896 multiplication of one signed double-word by another. If you do not
3897 define this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__muldi3},
3898 a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3899
3900 @findex DIVDI3_LIBCALL
3901 @item DIVDI3_LIBCALL
3902 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3903 division of one signed double-word by another. If you do not define
3904 this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__divdi3}, a
3905 function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3906
3907 @findex UDIVDI3_LIBCALL
3908 @item UDIVDI3_LIBCALL
3909 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3910 division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do not define
3911 this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__udivdi3}, a
3912 function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3913
3914 @findex MODDI3_LIBCALL
3915 @item MODDI3_LIBCALL
3916 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
3917 remainder in division of one signed double-word by another. If you do
3918 not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
3919 @code{__moddi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3920
3921 @findex UMODDI3_LIBCALL
3922 @item UMODDI3_LIBCALL
3923 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
3924 remainder in division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do
3925 not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
3926 @code{__umoddi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3927
3928 @findex INIT_TARGET_OPTABS
3929 @item INIT_TARGET_OPTABS
3930 Define this macro as a C statement that declares additional library
3931 routines renames existing ones. @code{init_optabs} calls this macro after
3932 initializing all the normal library routines.
3933
3934 @findex TARGET_EDOM
3935 @cindex @code{EDOM}, implicit usage
3936 @item TARGET_EDOM
3937 The value of @code{EDOM} on the target machine, as a C integer constant
3938 expression. If you don't define this macro, GNU CC does not attempt to
3939 deposit the value of @code{EDOM} into @code{errno} directly. Look in
3940 @file{/usr/include/errno.h} to find the value of @code{EDOM} on your
3941 system.
3942
3943 If you do not define @code{TARGET_EDOM}, then compiled code reports
3944 domain errors by calling the library function and letting it report the
3945 error. If mathematical functions on your system use @code{matherr} when
3946 there is an error, then you should leave @code{TARGET_EDOM} undefined so
3947 that @code{matherr} is used normally.
3948
3949 @findex GEN_ERRNO_RTX
3950 @cindex @code{errno}, implicit usage
3951 @item GEN_ERRNO_RTX
3952 Define this macro as a C expression to create an rtl expression that
3953 refers to the global ``variable'' @code{errno}. (On certain systems,
3954 @code{errno} may not actually be a variable.) If you don't define this
3955 macro, a reasonable default is used.
3956
3957 @findex TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
3958 @cindex @code{bcopy}, implicit usage
3959 @cindex @code{memcpy}, implicit usage
3960 @cindex @code{bzero}, implicit usage
3961 @cindex @code{memset}, implicit usage
3962 @item TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
3963 Define this macro if GNU CC should generate calls to the System V
3964 (and ANSI C) library functions @code{memcpy} and @code{memset}
3965 rather than the BSD functions @code{bcopy} and @code{bzero}.
3966
3967 @findex LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE
3968 @item LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE
3969 Define this macro if only @code{float} arguments cannot be passed to
3970 library routines (so they must be converted to @code{double}). This
3971 macro affects both how library calls are generated and how the library
3972 routines in @file{libgcc1.c} accept their arguments. It is useful on
3973 machines where floating and fixed point arguments are passed
3974 differently, such as the i860.
3975
3976 @findex FLOAT_ARG_TYPE
3977 @item FLOAT_ARG_TYPE
3978 Define this macro to override the type used by the library routines to
3979 pick up arguments of type @code{float}. (By default, they use a union
3980 of @code{float} and @code{int}.)
3981
3982 The obvious choice would be @code{float}---but that won't work with
3983 traditional C compilers that expect all arguments declared as @code{float}
3984 to arrive as @code{double}. To avoid this conversion, the library routines
3985 ask for the value as some other type and then treat it as a @code{float}.
3986
3987 On some systems, no other type will work for this. For these systems,
3988 you must use @code{LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE} instead, to force conversion of
3989 the values @code{double} before they are passed.
3990
3991 @findex FLOATIFY
3992 @item FLOATIFY (@var{passed-value})
3993 Define this macro to override the way library routines redesignate a
3994 @code{float} argument as a @code{float} instead of the type it was
3995 passed as. The default is an expression which takes the @code{float}
3996 field of the union.
3997
3998 @findex FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE
3999 @item FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE
4000 Define this macro to override the type used by the library routines to
4001 return values that ought to have type @code{float}. (By default, they
4002 use @code{int}.)
4003
4004 The obvious choice would be @code{float}---but that won't work with
4005 traditional C compilers gratuitously convert values declared as
4006 @code{float} into @code{double}.
4007
4008 @findex INTIFY
4009 @item INTIFY (@var{float-value})
4010 Define this macro to override the way the value of a
4011 @code{float}-returning library routine should be packaged in order to
4012 return it. These functions are actually declared to return type
4013 @code{FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE} (normally @code{int}).
4014
4015 These values can't be returned as type @code{float} because traditional
4016 C compilers would gratuitously convert the value to a @code{double}.
4017
4018 A local variable named @code{intify} is always available when the macro
4019 @code{INTIFY} is used. It is a union of a @code{float} field named
4020 @code{f} and a field named @code{i} whose type is
4021 @code{FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE} or @code{int}.
4022
4023 If you don't define this macro, the default definition works by copying
4024 the value through that union.
4025
4026 @findex nongcc_SI_type
4027 @item nongcc_SI_type
4028 Define this macro as the name of the data type corresponding to
4029 @code{SImode} in the system's own C compiler.
4030
4031 You need not define this macro if that type is @code{long int}, as it usually
4032 is.
4033
4034 @findex nongcc_word_type
4035 @item nongcc_word_type
4036 Define this macro as the name of the data type corresponding to the
4037 word_mode in the system's own C compiler.
4038
4039 You need not define this macro if that type is @code{long int}, as it usually
4040 is.
4041
4042 @findex perform_@dots{}
4043 @item perform_@dots{}
4044 Define these macros to supply explicit C statements to carry out various
4045 arithmetic operations on types @code{float} and @code{double} in the
4046 library routines in @file{libgcc1.c}. See that file for a full list
4047 of these macros and their arguments.
4048
4049 On most machines, you don't need to define any of these macros, because
4050 the C compiler that comes with the system takes care of doing them.
4051
4052 @findex NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4053 @item NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4054 Define this macro to generate code for Objective C message sending using
4055 the calling convention of the NeXT system. This calling convention
4056 involves passing the object, the selector and the method arguments all
4057 at once to the method-lookup library function.
4058
4059 The default calling convention passes just the object and the selector
4060 to the lookup function, which returns a pointer to the method.
4061 @end table
4062
4063 @node Addressing Modes
4064 @section Addressing Modes
4065 @cindex addressing modes
4066
4067 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4068 This is about addressing modes.
4069
4070 @table @code
4071 @findex HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4072 @item HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4073 Define this macro if the machine supports post-increment addressing.
4074
4075 @findex HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4076 @findex HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4077 @findex HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4078 @item HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4079 @itemx HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4080 @itemx HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4081 Similar for other kinds of addressing.
4082
4083 @findex CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P
4084 @item CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (@var{x})
4085 A C expression that is 1 if the RTX @var{x} is a constant which
4086 is a valid address. On most machines, this can be defined as
4087 @code{CONSTANT_P (@var{x})}, but a few machines are more restrictive
4088 in which constant addresses are supported.
4089
4090 @findex CONSTANT_P
4091 @code{CONSTANT_P} accepts integer-values expressions whose values are
4092 not explicitly known, such as @code{symbol_ref}, @code{label_ref}, and
4093 @code{high} expressions and @code{const} arithmetic expressions, in
4094 addition to @code{const_int} and @code{const_double} expressions.
4095
4096 @findex MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4097 @item MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4098 A number, the maximum number of registers that can appear in a valid
4099 memory address. Note that it is up to you to specify a value equal to
4100 the maximum number that @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} would ever
4101 accept.
4102
4103 @findex GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS
4104 @item GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS (@var{mode}, @var{x}, @var{label})
4105 A C compound statement with a conditional @code{goto @var{label};}
4106 executed if @var{x} (an RTX) is a legitimate memory address on the
4107 target machine for a memory operand of mode @var{mode}.
4108
4109 It usually pays to define several simpler macros to serve as
4110 subroutines for this one. Otherwise it may be too complicated to
4111 understand.
4112
4113 This macro must exist in two variants: a strict variant and a
4114 non-strict one. The strict variant is used in the reload pass. It
4115 must be defined so that any pseudo-register that has not been
4116 allocated a hard register is considered a memory reference. In
4117 contexts where some kind of register is required, a pseudo-register
4118 with no hard register must be rejected.
4119
4120 The non-strict variant is used in other passes. It must be defined to
4121 accept all pseudo-registers in every context where some kind of
4122 register is required.
4123
4124 @findex REG_OK_STRICT
4125 Compiler source files that want to use the strict variant of this
4126 macro define the macro @code{REG_OK_STRICT}. You should use an
4127 @code{#ifdef REG_OK_STRICT} conditional to define the strict variant
4128 in that case and the non-strict variant otherwise.
4129
4130 Subroutines to check for acceptable registers for various purposes (one
4131 for base registers, one for index registers, and so on) are typically
4132 among the subroutines used to define @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS}.
4133 Then only these subroutine macros need have two variants; the higher
4134 levels of macros may be the same whether strict or not.@refill
4135
4136 Normally, constant addresses which are the sum of a @code{symbol_ref}
4137 and an integer are stored inside a @code{const} RTX to mark them as
4138 constant. Therefore, there is no need to recognize such sums
4139 specifically as legitimate addresses. Normally you would simply
4140 recognize any @code{const} as legitimate.
4141
4142 Usually @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS} is not prepared to handle constant
4143 sums that are not marked with @code{const}. It assumes that a naked
4144 @code{plus} indicates indexing. If so, then you @emph{must} reject such
4145 naked constant sums as illegitimate addresses, so that none of them will
4146 be given to @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}.
4147
4148 @cindex @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} and address validation
4149 On some machines, whether a symbolic address is legitimate depends on
4150 the section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the
4151 macro @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
4152 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. When you see a
4153 @code{const}, you will have to look inside it to find the
4154 @code{symbol_ref} in order to determine the section. @xref{Assembler
4155 Format}.
4156
4157 @findex saveable_obstack
4158 The best way to modify the name string is by adding text to the
4159 beginning, with suitable punctuation to prevent any ambiguity. Allocate
4160 the new name in @code{saveable_obstack}. You will have to modify
4161 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to remove and decode the added text and
4162 output the name accordingly, and define @code{STRIP_NAME_ENCODING} to
4163 access the original name string.
4164
4165 You can check the information stored here into the @code{symbol_ref} in
4166 the definitions of the macros @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} and
4167 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}.
4168
4169 @findex REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P
4170 @item REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{x})
4171 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} (assumed to be a @code{reg}
4172 RTX) is valid for use as a base register. For hard registers, it
4173 should always accept those which the hardware permits and reject the
4174 others. Whether the macro accepts or rejects pseudo registers must be
4175 controlled by @code{REG_OK_STRICT} as described above. This usually
4176 requires two variant definitions, of which @code{REG_OK_STRICT}
4177 controls the one actually used.
4178
4179 @findex REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P
4180 @item REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{x}, @var{mode})
4181 A C expression that is just like @code{REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
4182 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
4183 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
4184 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
4185 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
4186 @code{REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
4187
4188 @findex REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P
4189 @item REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{x})
4190 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} (assumed to be a @code{reg}
4191 RTX) is valid for use as an index register.
4192
4193 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
4194 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
4195 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
4196 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
4197 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
4198 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
4199 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
4200 only if neither labeling works.
4201
4202 @findex LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4203 @item LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{oldx}, @var{mode}, @var{win})
4204 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x} with a valid
4205 memory address for an operand of mode @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a
4206 C statement label elsewhere in the code; the macro definition may use
4207
4208 @example
4209 GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS (@var{mode}, @var{x}, @var{win});
4210 @end example
4211
4212 @noindent
4213 to avoid further processing if the address has become legitimate.
4214
4215 @findex break_out_memory_refs
4216 @var{x} will always be the result of a call to @code{break_out_memory_refs},
4217 and @var{oldx} will be the operand that was given to that function to produce
4218 @var{x}.
4219
4220 The code generated by this macro should not alter the substructure of
4221 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4222 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4223
4224 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4225 address. The compiler has standard ways of doing so in all cases. In
4226 fact, it is safe for this macro to do nothing. But often a
4227 machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4228
4229 @findex LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS
4230 @item LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{opnum}, @var{type}, @var{ind_levels}, @var{win})
4231 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x}, which is an address
4232 that needs reloading, with a valid memory address for an operand of mode
4233 @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a C statement label elsewhere in the code.
4234 It is not necessary to define this macro, but it might be useful for
4235 performance reasons.
4236
4237 For example, on the i386, it is sometimes possible to use a single
4238 reload register instead of two by reloading a sum of two pseudo
4239 registers into a register. On the other hand, for number of RISC
4240 processors offsets are limited so that often an intermediate address
4241 needs to be generated in order to address a stack slot. By defining
4242 LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS appropriately, the intermediate addresses
4243 generated for adjacent some stack slots can be made identical, and thus
4244 be shared.
4245
4246 @findex strict_memory_address_p
4247 The macro definition may use @code{strict_memory_address_p} to test if
4248 the address has become legitimate.
4249
4250 @findex push_reload
4251 It may use @code{push_reload} to indicate parts that need reloading.
4252 @var{opnum}, @var{type} and @var{ind_levels} are usually suitable to be
4253 passed unaltered to push_reload.
4254
4255 The code generated by this macro should not alter the substructure of
4256 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4257 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4258 This also applies to parts that you change indirectly by calling
4259 @code{push_reload}.
4260
4261 @findex copy_rtx
4262 If you want to change only a part of @var{x}, one standard way of doing
4263 this is to use @code{copy_rtx}. Note, however, that is unshares only a
4264 single level of rtl. Thus, if the part to be changed is not at the
4265 top level, you'll need to replace first the top leve
4266 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4267 address; but often a machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4268
4269 @emph{Note}: This macro should be used with caution. It is necessary
4270 to know something of how reload works in order to effectively use this,
4271 and it is quite easy to produce macros that build in too much knowledge
4272 of reload internals.
4273
4274 @findex GO_IF_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS
4275 @item GO_IF_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS (@var{addr}, @var{label})
4276 A C statement or compound statement with a conditional @code{goto
4277 @var{label};} executed if memory address @var{x} (an RTX) can have
4278 different meanings depending on the machine mode of the memory
4279 reference it is used for or if the address is valid for some modes
4280 but not others.
4281
4282 Autoincrement and autodecrement addresses typically have mode-dependent
4283 effects because the amount of the increment or decrement is the size
4284 of the operand being addressed. Some machines have other mode-dependent
4285 addresses. Many RISC machines have no mode-dependent addresses.
4286
4287 You may assume that @var{addr} is a valid address for the machine.
4288
4289 @findex LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P
4290 @item LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (@var{x})
4291 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate constant for
4292 an immediate operand on the target machine. You can assume that
4293 @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not check this. In fact,
4294 @samp{1} is a suitable definition for this macro on machines where
4295 anything @code{CONSTANT_P} is valid.@refill
4296
4297 @findex DONT_RECORD_EQUIVALENCE
4298 @item DONT_RECORD_EQUIVALENCE (@var{note})
4299 A C expression that is nonzero if the @code{REG_EQUAL} note @var{x} should not
4300 be promoted to a @code{REG_EQUIV} note.
4301
4302 Define this macro if @var{note} refers to a constant that must be accepted
4303 by @code{LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P}, but must not appear as an immediate operand.
4304
4305 Most machine descriptions do not need to define this macro.
4306 @end table
4307
4308 @node Condition Code
4309 @section Condition Code Status
4310 @cindex condition code status
4311
4312 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4313 This describes the condition code status.
4314
4315 @findex cc_status
4316 The file @file{conditions.h} defines a variable @code{cc_status} to
4317 describe how the condition code was computed (in case the interpretation of
4318 the condition code depends on the instruction that it was set by). This
4319 variable contains the RTL expressions on which the condition code is
4320 currently based, and several standard flags.
4321
4322 Sometimes additional machine-specific flags must be defined in the machine
4323 description header file. It can also add additional machine-specific
4324 information by defining @code{CC_STATUS_MDEP}.
4325
4326 @table @code
4327 @findex CC_STATUS_MDEP
4328 @item CC_STATUS_MDEP
4329 C code for a data type which is used for declaring the @code{mdep}
4330 component of @code{cc_status}. It defaults to @code{int}.
4331
4332 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4333
4334 @findex CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4335 @item CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4336 A C expression to initialize the @code{mdep} field to ``empty''.
4337 The default definition does nothing, since most machines don't use
4338 the field anyway. If you want to use the field, you should probably
4339 define this macro to initialize it.
4340
4341 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4342
4343 @findex NOTICE_UPDATE_CC
4344 @item NOTICE_UPDATE_CC (@var{exp}, @var{insn})
4345 A C compound statement to set the components of @code{cc_status}
4346 appropriately for an insn @var{insn} whose body is @var{exp}. It is
4347 this macro's responsibility to recognize insns that set the condition
4348 code as a byproduct of other activity as well as those that explicitly
4349 set @code{(cc0)}.
4350
4351 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4352
4353 If there are insns that do not set the condition code but do alter
4354 other machine registers, this macro must check to see whether they
4355 invalidate the expressions that the condition code is recorded as
4356 reflecting. For example, on the 68000, insns that store in address
4357 registers do not set the condition code, which means that usually
4358 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} can leave @code{cc_status} unaltered for such
4359 insns. But suppose that the previous insn set the condition code
4360 based on location @samp{a4@@(102)} and the current insn stores a new
4361 value in @samp{a4}. Although the condition code is not changed by
4362 this, it will no longer be true that it reflects the contents of
4363 @samp{a4@@(102)}. Therefore, @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must alter
4364 @code{cc_status} in this case to say that nothing is known about the
4365 condition code value.
4366
4367 The definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must be prepared to deal
4368 with the results of peephole optimization: insns whose patterns are
4369 @code{parallel} RTXs containing various @code{reg}, @code{mem} or
4370 constants which are just the operands. The RTL structure of these
4371 insns is not sufficient to indicate what the insns actually do. What
4372 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} should do when it sees one is just to run
4373 @code{CC_STATUS_INIT}.
4374
4375 A possible definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} is to call a function
4376 that looks at an attribute (@pxref{Insn Attributes}) named, for example,
4377 @samp{cc}. This avoids having detailed information about patterns in
4378 two places, the @file{md} file and in @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}.
4379
4380 @findex EXTRA_CC_MODES
4381 @item EXTRA_CC_MODES
4382 A list of names to be used for additional modes for condition code
4383 values in registers (@pxref{Jump Patterns}). These names are added
4384 to @code{enum machine_mode} and all have class @code{MODE_CC}. By
4385 convention, they should start with @samp{CC} and end with @samp{mode}.
4386
4387 You should only define this macro if your machine does not use @code{cc0}
4388 and only if additional modes are required.
4389
4390 @findex EXTRA_CC_NAMES
4391 @item EXTRA_CC_NAMES
4392 A list of C strings giving the names for the modes listed in
4393 @code{EXTRA_CC_MODES}. For example, the Sparc defines this macro and
4394 @code{EXTRA_CC_MODES} as
4395
4396 @smallexample
4397 #define EXTRA_CC_MODES CC_NOOVmode, CCFPmode, CCFPEmode
4398 #define EXTRA_CC_NAMES "CC_NOOV", "CCFP", "CCFPE"
4399 @end smallexample
4400
4401 This macro is not required if @code{EXTRA_CC_MODES} is not defined.
4402
4403 @findex SELECT_CC_MODE
4404 @item SELECT_CC_MODE (@var{op}, @var{x}, @var{y})
4405 Returns a mode from class @code{MODE_CC} to be used when comparison
4406 operation code @var{op} is applied to rtx @var{x} and @var{y}. For
4407 example, on the Sparc, @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} is defined as (see
4408 @pxref{Jump Patterns} for a description of the reason for this
4409 definition)
4410
4411 @smallexample
4412 #define SELECT_CC_MODE(OP,X,Y) \
4413 (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (X)) == MODE_FLOAT \
4414 ? ((OP == EQ || OP == NE) ? CCFPmode : CCFPEmode) \
4415 : ((GET_CODE (X) == PLUS || GET_CODE (X) == MINUS \
4416 || GET_CODE (X) == NEG) \
4417 ? CC_NOOVmode : CCmode))
4418 @end smallexample
4419
4420 You need not define this macro if @code{EXTRA_CC_MODES} is not defined.
4421
4422 @findex CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON
4423 @item CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON (@var{code}, @var{op0}, @var{op1})
4424 One some machines not all possible comparisons are defined, but you can
4425 convert an invalid comparison into a valid one. For example, the Alpha
4426 does not have a @code{GT} comparison, but you can use an @code{LT}
4427 comparison instead and swap the order of the operands.
4428
4429 On such machines, define this macro to be a C statement to do any
4430 required conversions. @var{code} is the initial comparison code
4431 and @var{op0} and @var{op1} are the left and right operands of the
4432 comparison, respectively. You should modify @var{code}, @var{op0}, and
4433 @var{op1} as required.
4434
4435 GNU CC will not assume that the comparison resulting from this macro is
4436 valid but will see if the resulting insn matches a pattern in the
4437 @file{md} file.
4438
4439 You need not define this macro if it would never change the comparison
4440 code or operands.
4441
4442 @findex REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE
4443 @item REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})
4444 A C expression whose value is one if it is always safe to reverse a
4445 comparison whose mode is @var{mode}. If @code{SELECT_CC_MODE}
4446 can ever return @var{mode} for a floating-point inequality comparison,
4447 then @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} must be zero.
4448
4449 You need not define this macro if it would always returns zero or if the
4450 floating-point format is anything other than @code{IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT}.
4451 For example, here is the definition used on the Sparc, where floating-point
4452 inequality comparisons are always given @code{CCFPEmode}:
4453
4454 @smallexample
4455 #define REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE(MODE) ((MODE) != CCFPEmode)
4456 @end smallexample
4457
4458 @end table
4459
4460 @node Costs
4461 @section Describing Relative Costs of Operations
4462 @cindex costs of instructions
4463 @cindex relative costs
4464 @cindex speed of instructions
4465
4466 These macros let you describe the relative speed of various operations
4467 on the target machine.
4468
4469 @table @code
4470 @findex CONST_COSTS
4471 @item CONST_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
4472 A part of a C @code{switch} statement that describes the relative costs
4473 of constant RTL expressions. It must contain @code{case} labels for
4474 expression codes @code{const_int}, @code{const}, @code{symbol_ref},
4475 @code{label_ref} and @code{const_double}. Each case must ultimately
4476 reach a @code{return} statement to return the relative cost of the use
4477 of that kind of constant value in an expression. The cost may depend on
4478 the precise value of the constant, which is available for examination in
4479 @var{x}, and the rtx code of the expression in which it is contained,
4480 found in @var{outer_code}.
4481
4482 @var{code} is the expression code---redundant, since it can be
4483 obtained with @code{GET_CODE (@var{x})}.
4484
4485 @findex RTX_COSTS
4486 @findex COSTS_N_INSNS
4487 @item RTX_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
4488 Like @code{CONST_COSTS} but applies to nonconstant RTL expressions.
4489 This can be used, for example, to indicate how costly a multiply
4490 instruction is. In writing this macro, you can use the construct
4491 @code{COSTS_N_INSNS (@var{n})} to specify a cost equal to @var{n} fast
4492 instructions. @var{outer_code} is the code of the expression in which
4493 @var{x} is contained.
4494
4495 This macro is optional; do not define it if the default cost assumptions
4496 are adequate for the target machine.
4497
4498 @findex DEFAULT_RTX_COSTS
4499 @item DEFAULT_RTX_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
4500 This macro, if defined, is called for any case not handled by the
4501 @code{RTX_COSTS} or @code{CONST_COSTS} macros. This eliminates the need
4502 to put case labels into the macro, but the code, or any functions it
4503 calls, must assume that the RTL in @var{x} could be of any type that has
4504 not already been handled. The arguments are the same as for
4505 @code{RTX_COSTS}, and the macro should execute a return statement giving
4506 the cost of any RTL expressions that it can handle. The default cost
4507 calculation is used for any RTL for which this macro does not return a
4508 value.
4509
4510 This macro is optional; do not define it if the default cost assumptions
4511 are adequate for the target machine.
4512
4513 @findex ADDRESS_COST
4514 @item ADDRESS_COST (@var{address})
4515 An expression giving the cost of an addressing mode that contains
4516 @var{address}. If not defined, the cost is computed from
4517 the @var{address} expression and the @code{CONST_COSTS} values.
4518
4519 For most CISC machines, the default cost is a good approximation of the
4520 true cost of the addressing mode. However, on RISC machines, all
4521 instructions normally have the same length and execution time. Hence
4522 all addresses will have equal costs.
4523
4524 In cases where more than one form of an address is known, the form with
4525 the lowest cost will be used. If multiple forms have the same, lowest,
4526 cost, the one that is the most complex will be used.
4527
4528 For example, suppose an address that is equal to the sum of a register
4529 and a constant is used twice in the same basic block. When this macro
4530 is not defined, the address will be computed in a register and memory
4531 references will be indirect through that register. On machines where
4532 the cost of the addressing mode containing the sum is no higher than
4533 that of a simple indirect reference, this will produce an additional
4534 instruction and possibly require an additional register. Proper
4535 specification of this macro eliminates this overhead for such machines.
4536
4537 Similar use of this macro is made in strength reduction of loops.
4538
4539 @var{address} need not be valid as an address. In such a case, the cost
4540 is not relevant and can be any value; invalid addresses need not be
4541 assigned a different cost.
4542
4543 On machines where an address involving more than one register is as
4544 cheap as an address computation involving only one register, defining
4545 @code{ADDRESS_COST} to reflect this can cause two registers to be live
4546 over a region of code where only one would have been if
4547 @code{ADDRESS_COST} were not defined in that manner. This effect should
4548 be considered in the definition of this macro. Equivalent costs should
4549 probably only be given to addresses with different numbers of registers
4550 on machines with lots of registers.
4551
4552 This macro will normally either not be defined or be defined as a
4553 constant.
4554
4555 @findex REGISTER_MOVE_COST
4556 @item REGISTER_MOVE_COST (@var{from}, @var{to})
4557 A C expression for the cost of moving data from a register in class
4558 @var{from} to one in class @var{to}. The classes are expressed using
4559 the enumeration values such as @code{GENERAL_REGS}. A value of 2 is the
4560 default; other values are interpreted relative to that.
4561
4562 It is not required that the cost always equal 2 when @var{from} is the
4563 same as @var{to}; on some machines it is expensive to move between
4564 registers if they are not general registers.
4565
4566 If reload sees an insn consisting of a single @code{set} between two
4567 hard registers, and if @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their
4568 classes returns a value of 2, reload does not check to ensure that the
4569 constraints of the insn are met. Setting a cost of other than 2 will
4570 allow reload to verify that the constraints are met. You should do this
4571 if the @samp{mov@var{m}} pattern's constraints do not allow such copying.
4572
4573 @findex MEMORY_MOVE_COST
4574 @item MEMORY_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{class}, @var{in})
4575 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} between a
4576 register of class @var{class} and memory; @var{in} is zero if the value
4577 is to be written to memory, non-zero if it is to be read in. If this
4578 macro is not defined, the default cost is assumed to be 4, plus any costs
4579 that would be incurred copying via a secondary reload register, if
4580 needed. This cost is relative to those in @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST}.
4581
4582 If moving between registers and memory is more expensive than between
4583 two registers, you should define this macro to express the relative cost.
4584
4585 If a secondary reload register would be required for @var{class}, but the
4586 reload mechanism is more complex than copying via an intermediate, this
4587 macro should be defined to reflect the actual cost of the move.
4588
4589 The function @code{memory_move_secondary_cost}, which is defined if
4590 secondary reloads are needed, will compute the costs due to copying; you
4591 can use this function if you need to take other factors into account as
4592 well, or if the default base value of 4 is not correct for your machine.
4593
4594 @findex BRANCH_COST
4595 @item BRANCH_COST
4596 A C expression for the cost of a branch instruction. A value of 1 is
4597 the default; other values are interpreted relative to that.
4598 @end table
4599
4600 Here are additional macros which do not specify precise relative costs,
4601 but only that certain actions are more expensive than GNU CC would
4602 ordinarily expect.
4603
4604 @table @code
4605 @findex SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4606 @item SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4607 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if accessing less
4608 than a word of memory (i.e. a @code{char} or a @code{short}) is no
4609 faster than accessing a word of memory, i.e., if such access
4610 require more than one instruction or if there is no difference in cost
4611 between byte and (aligned) word loads.
4612
4613 When this macro is not defined, the compiler will access a field by
4614 finding the smallest containing object; when it is defined, a fullword
4615 load will be used if alignment permits. Unless bytes accesses are
4616 faster than word accesses, using word accesses is preferable since it
4617 may eliminate subsequent memory access if subsequent accesses occur to
4618 other fields in the same word of the structure, but to different bytes.
4619
4620 @findex SLOW_ZERO_EXTEND
4621 @item SLOW_ZERO_EXTEND
4622 Define this macro if zero-extension (of a @code{char} or @code{short}
4623 to an @code{int}) can be done faster if the destination is a register
4624 that is known to be zero.
4625
4626 If you define this macro, you must have instruction patterns that
4627 recognize RTL structures like this:
4628
4629 @smallexample
4630 (set (strict_low_part (subreg:QI (reg:SI @dots{}) 0)) @dots{})
4631 @end smallexample
4632
4633 @noindent
4634 and likewise for @code{HImode}.
4635
4636 @findex SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
4637 @item SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
4638 Define this macro to be the value 1 if unaligned accesses have a cost
4639 many times greater than aligned accesses, for example if they are
4640 emulated in a trap handler.
4641
4642 When this macro is non-zero, the compiler will act as if
4643 @code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} were non-zero when generating code for block
4644 moves. This can cause significantly more instructions to be produced.
4645 Therefore, do not set this macro non-zero if unaligned accesses only add a
4646 cycle or two to the time for a memory access.
4647
4648 If the value of this macro is always zero, it need not be defined.
4649
4650 @findex DONT_REDUCE_ADDR
4651 @item DONT_REDUCE_ADDR
4652 Define this macro to inhibit strength reduction of memory addresses.
4653 (On some machines, such strength reduction seems to do harm rather
4654 than good.)
4655
4656 @findex MOVE_RATIO
4657 @item MOVE_RATIO
4658 The number of scalar move insns which should be generated instead of a
4659 string move insn or a library call. Increasing the value will always
4660 make code faster, but eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4661
4662 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4663
4664 @findex NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4665 @item NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4666 Define this macro if it is as good or better to call a constant
4667 function address than to call an address kept in a register.
4668
4669 @findex NO_RECURSIVE_FUNCTION_CSE
4670 @item NO_RECURSIVE_FUNCTION_CSE
4671 Define this macro if it is as good or better for a function to call
4672 itself with an explicit address than to call an address kept in a
4673 register.
4674
4675 @findex ADJUST_COST
4676 @item ADJUST_COST (@var{insn}, @var{link}, @var{dep_insn}, @var{cost})
4677 A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the integer variable @var{cost}
4678 based on the relationship between @var{insn} that is dependent on
4679 @var{dep_insn} through the dependence @var{link}. The default is to
4680 make no adjustment to @var{cost}. This can be used for example to
4681 specify to the scheduler that an output- or anti-dependence does not
4682 incur the same cost as a data-dependence.
4683
4684 @findex ADJUST_PRIORITY
4685 @item ADJUST_PRIORITY (@var{insn})
4686 A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the integer scheduling
4687 priority @code{INSN_PRIORITY(@var{insn})}. Reduce the priority
4688 to execute the @var{insn} earlier, increase the priority to execute
4689 @var{insn} later. Do not define this macro if you do not need to
4690 adjust the scheduling priorities of insns.
4691 @end table
4692
4693 @node Sections
4694 @section Dividing the Output into Sections (Texts, Data, @dots{})
4695 @c the above section title is WAY too long. maybe cut the part between
4696 @c the (...)? --mew 10feb93
4697
4698 An object file is divided into sections containing different types of
4699 data. In the most common case, there are three sections: the @dfn{text
4700 section}, which holds instructions and read-only data; the @dfn{data
4701 section}, which holds initialized writable data; and the @dfn{bss
4702 section}, which holds uninitialized data. Some systems have other kinds
4703 of sections.
4704
4705 The compiler must tell the assembler when to switch sections. These
4706 macros control what commands to output to tell the assembler this. You
4707 can also define additional sections.
4708
4709 @table @code
4710 @findex TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4711 @item TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4712 A C expression whose value is a string containing the assembler
4713 operation that should precede instructions and read-only data. Normally
4714 @code{".text"} is right.
4715
4716 @findex DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4717 @item DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4718 A C expression whose value is a string containing the assembler
4719 operation to identify the following data as writable initialized data.
4720 Normally @code{".data"} is right.
4721
4722 @findex SHARED_SECTION_ASM_OP
4723 @item SHARED_SECTION_ASM_OP
4724 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4725 assembler operation to identify the following data as shared data. If
4726 not defined, @code{DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP} will be used.
4727
4728 @findex BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4729 @item BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4730 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4731 assembler operation to identify the following data as uninitialized global
4732 data. If not defined, and neither @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS} nor
4733 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} are defined, uninitialized global data will be
4734 output in the data section if @samp{-fno-common} is passed, otherwise
4735 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} will be used.
4736
4737 @findex SHARED_BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4738 @item SHARED_BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4739 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4740 assembler operation to identify the following data as uninitialized global
4741 shared data. If not defined, and @code{BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP} is, the latter
4742 will be used.
4743
4744 @findex INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4745 @item INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4746 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4747 assembler operation to identify the following data as initialization
4748 code. If not defined, GNU CC will assume such a section does not
4749 exist.
4750
4751 @findex EXTRA_SECTIONS
4752 @findex in_text
4753 @findex in_data
4754 @item EXTRA_SECTIONS
4755 A list of names for sections other than the standard two, which are
4756 @code{in_text} and @code{in_data}. You need not define this macro
4757 on a system with no other sections (that GCC needs to use).
4758
4759 @findex EXTRA_SECTION_FUNCTIONS
4760 @findex text_section
4761 @findex data_section
4762 @item EXTRA_SECTION_FUNCTIONS
4763 One or more functions to be defined in @file{varasm.c}. These
4764 functions should do jobs analogous to those of @code{text_section} and
4765 @code{data_section}, for your additional sections. Do not define this
4766 macro if you do not define @code{EXTRA_SECTIONS}.
4767
4768 @findex READONLY_DATA_SECTION
4769 @item READONLY_DATA_SECTION
4770 On most machines, read-only variables, constants, and jump tables are
4771 placed in the text section. If this is not the case on your machine,
4772 this macro should be defined to be the name of a function (either
4773 @code{data_section} or a function defined in @code{EXTRA_SECTIONS}) that
4774 switches to the section to be used for read-only items.
4775
4776 If these items should be placed in the text section, this macro should
4777 not be defined.
4778
4779 @findex SELECT_SECTION
4780 @item SELECT_SECTION (@var{exp}, @var{reloc})
4781 A C statement or statements to switch to the appropriate section for
4782 output of @var{exp}. You can assume that @var{exp} is either a
4783 @code{VAR_DECL} node or a constant of some sort. @var{reloc}
4784 indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires link-time
4785 relocations. Select the section by calling @code{text_section} or one
4786 of the alternatives for other sections.
4787
4788 Do not define this macro if you put all read-only variables and
4789 constants in the read-only data section (usually the text section).
4790
4791 @findex SELECT_RTX_SECTION
4792 @item SELECT_RTX_SECTION (@var{mode}, @var{rtx})
4793 A C statement or statements to switch to the appropriate section for
4794 output of @var{rtx} in mode @var{mode}. You can assume that @var{rtx}
4795 is some kind of constant in RTL. The argument @var{mode} is redundant
4796 except in the case of a @code{const_int} rtx. Select the section by
4797 calling @code{text_section} or one of the alternatives for other
4798 sections.
4799
4800 Do not define this macro if you put all constants in the read-only
4801 data section.
4802
4803 @findex JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
4804 @item JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
4805 Define this macro if jump tables (for @code{tablejump} insns) should be
4806 output in the text section, along with the assembler instructions.
4807 Otherwise, the readonly data section is used.
4808
4809 This macro is irrelevant if there is no separate readonly data section.
4810
4811 @findex ENCODE_SECTION_INFO
4812 @item ENCODE_SECTION_INFO (@var{decl})
4813 Define this macro if references to a symbol must be treated differently
4814 depending on something about the variable or function named by the
4815 symbol (such as what section it is in).
4816
4817 The macro definition, if any, is executed immediately after the rtl for
4818 @var{decl} has been created and stored in @code{DECL_RTL (@var{decl})}.
4819 The value of the rtl will be a @code{mem} whose address is a
4820 @code{symbol_ref}.
4821
4822 @cindex @code{SYMBOL_REF_FLAG}, in @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}
4823 The usual thing for this macro to do is to record a flag in the
4824 @code{symbol_ref} (such as @code{SYMBOL_REF_FLAG}) or to store a
4825 modified name string in the @code{symbol_ref} (if one bit is not enough
4826 information).
4827
4828 @findex STRIP_NAME_ENCODING
4829 @item STRIP_NAME_ENCODING (@var{var}, @var{sym_name})
4830 Decode @var{sym_name} and store the real name part in @var{var}, sans
4831 the characters that encode section info. Define this macro if
4832 @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} alters the symbol's name string.
4833
4834 @findex UNIQUE_SECTION_P
4835 @item UNIQUE_SECTION_P (@var{decl})
4836 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{decl} should be placed
4837 into a unique section for some target-specific reason. If you do not
4838 define this macro, the default is @samp{0}. Note that the flag
4839 @samp{-ffunction-sections} will also cause functions to be placed into
4840 unique sections.
4841
4842 @findex UNIQUE_SECTION
4843 @item UNIQUE_SECTION (@var{decl}, @var{reloc})
4844 A C statement to build up a unique section name, expressed as a
4845 STRING_CST node, and assign it to @samp{DECL_SECTION_NAME (@var{decl})}.
4846 @var{reloc} indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires
4847 link-time relocations. If you do not define this macro, GNU CC will use
4848 the symbol name prefixed by @samp{.} as the section name.
4849 @end table
4850
4851 @node PIC
4852 @section Position Independent Code
4853 @cindex position independent code
4854 @cindex PIC
4855
4856 This section describes macros that help implement generation of position
4857 independent code. Simply defining these macros is not enough to
4858 generate valid PIC; you must also add support to the macros
4859 @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} and @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}, as
4860 well as @code{LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS}. You must modify the definition of
4861 @samp{movsi} to do something appropriate when the source operand
4862 contains a symbolic address. You may also need to alter the handling of
4863 switch statements so that they use relative addresses.
4864 @c i rearranged the order of the macros above to try to force one of
4865 @c them to the next line, to eliminate an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
4866
4867 @table @code
4868 @findex PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
4869 @item PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
4870 The register number of the register used to address a table of static
4871 data addresses in memory. In some cases this register is defined by a
4872 processor's ``application binary interface'' (ABI). When this macro
4873 is defined, RTL is generated for this register once, as with the stack
4874 pointer and frame pointer registers. If this macro is not defined, it
4875 is up to the machine-dependent files to allocate such a register (if
4876 necessary).
4877
4878 @findex PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
4879 @item PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
4880 Define this macro if the register defined by
4881 @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is clobbered by calls. Do not define
4882 this macro if @code{PPIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is not defined.
4883
4884 @findex FINALIZE_PIC
4885 @item FINALIZE_PIC
4886 By generating position-independent code, when two different programs (A
4887 and B) share a common library (libC.a), the text of the library can be
4888 shared whether or not the library is linked at the same address for both
4889 programs. In some of these environments, position-independent code
4890 requires not only the use of different addressing modes, but also
4891 special code to enable the use of these addressing modes.
4892
4893 The @code{FINALIZE_PIC} macro serves as a hook to emit these special
4894 codes once the function is being compiled into assembly code, but not
4895 before. (It is not done before, because in the case of compiling an
4896 inline function, it would lead to multiple PIC prologues being
4897 included in functions which used inline functions and were compiled to
4898 assembly language.)
4899
4900 @findex LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P
4901 @item LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (@var{x})
4902 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate immediate
4903 operand on the target machine when generating position independent code.
4904 You can assume that @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not
4905 check this. You can also assume @var{flag_pic} is true, so you need not
4906 check it either. You need not define this macro if all constants
4907 (including @code{SYMBOL_REF}) can be immediate operands when generating
4908 position independent code.
4909 @end table
4910
4911 @node Assembler Format
4912 @section Defining the Output Assembler Language
4913
4914 This section describes macros whose principal purpose is to describe how
4915 to write instructions in assembler language--rather than what the
4916 instructions do.
4917
4918 @menu
4919 * File Framework:: Structural information for the assembler file.
4920 * Data Output:: Output of constants (numbers, strings, addresses).
4921 * Uninitialized Data:: Output of uninitialized variables.
4922 * Label Output:: Output and generation of labels.
4923 * Initialization:: General principles of initialization
4924 and termination routines.
4925 * Macros for Initialization::
4926 Specific macros that control the handling of
4927 initialization and termination routines.
4928 * Instruction Output:: Output of actual instructions.
4929 * Dispatch Tables:: Output of jump tables.
4930 * Exception Region Output:: Output of exception region code.
4931 * Alignment Output:: Pseudo ops for alignment and skipping data.
4932 @end menu
4933
4934 @node File Framework
4935 @subsection The Overall Framework of an Assembler File
4936 @cindex assembler format
4937 @cindex output of assembler code
4938
4939 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4940 This describes the overall framework of an assembler file.
4941
4942 @table @code
4943 @findex ASM_FILE_START
4944 @item ASM_FILE_START (@var{stream})
4945 A C expression which outputs to the stdio stream @var{stream}
4946 some appropriate text to go at the start of an assembler file.
4947
4948 Normally this macro is defined to output a line containing
4949 @samp{#NO_APP}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
4950 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it can save time by not
4951 checking for certain assembler constructs.
4952
4953 On systems that use SDB, it is necessary to output certain commands;
4954 see @file{attasm.h}.
4955
4956 @findex ASM_FILE_END
4957 @item ASM_FILE_END (@var{stream})
4958 A C expression which outputs to the stdio stream @var{stream}
4959 some appropriate text to go at the end of an assembler file.
4960
4961 If this macro is not defined, the default is to output nothing
4962 special at the end of the file. Most systems don't require any
4963 definition.
4964
4965 On systems that use SDB, it is necessary to output certain commands;
4966 see @file{attasm.h}.
4967
4968 @findex ASM_IDENTIFY_GCC
4969 @item ASM_IDENTIFY_GCC (@var{file})
4970 A C statement to output assembler commands which will identify
4971 the object file as having been compiled with GNU CC (or another
4972 GNU compiler).
4973
4974 If you don't define this macro, the string @samp{gcc_compiled.:}
4975 is output. This string is calculated to define a symbol which,
4976 on BSD systems, will never be defined for any other reason.
4977 GDB checks for the presence of this symbol when reading the
4978 symbol table of an executable.
4979
4980 On non-BSD systems, you must arrange communication with GDB in
4981 some other fashion. If GDB is not used on your system, you can
4982 define this macro with an empty body.
4983
4984 @findex ASM_COMMENT_START
4985 @item ASM_COMMENT_START
4986 A C string constant describing how to begin a comment in the target
4987 assembler language. The compiler assumes that the comment will end at
4988 the end of the line.
4989
4990 @findex ASM_APP_ON
4991 @item ASM_APP_ON
4992 A C string constant for text to be output before each @code{asm}
4993 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
4994 @code{"#APP"}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
4995 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it must check the lines
4996 that follow for all valid assembler constructs.
4997
4998 @findex ASM_APP_OFF
4999 @item ASM_APP_OFF
5000 A C string constant for text to be output after each @code{asm}
5001 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5002 @code{"#NO_APP"}, which tells the GNU assembler to resume making the
5003 time-saving assumptions that are valid for ordinary compiler output.
5004
5005 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
5006 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5007 A C statement to output COFF information or DWARF debugging information
5008 which indicates that filename @var{name} is the current source file to
5009 the stdio stream @var{stream}.
5010
5011 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
5012 for the file format in use is appropriate.
5013
5014 @findex OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING
5015 @item OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5016 A C statement to output the string @var{string} to the stdio stream
5017 @var{stream}. If you do not call the function @code{output_quoted_string}
5018 in your config files, GNU CC will only call it to output filenames to
5019 the assembler source. So you can use it to canonicalize the format
5020 of the filename using this macro.
5021
5022 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE
5023 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line})
5024 A C statement to output DBX or SDB debugging information before code
5025 for line number @var{line} of the current source file to the
5026 stdio stream @var{stream}.
5027
5028 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of debugging
5029 information for the debugger in use is appropriate.
5030
5031 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT
5032 @item ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5033 A C statement to output something to the assembler file to handle a
5034 @samp{#ident} directive containing the text @var{string}. If this
5035 macro is not defined, nothing is output for a @samp{#ident} directive.
5036
5037 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SECTION_NAME
5038 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SECTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{reloc})
5039 A C statement to output something to the assembler file to switch to section
5040 @var{name} for object @var{decl} which is either a @code{FUNCTION_DECL}, a
5041 @code{VAR_DECL} or @code{NULL_TREE}. @var{reloc}
5042 indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires link-time
5043 relocations. Some target formats do not support
5044 arbitrary sections. Do not define this macro in such cases.
5045
5046 At present this macro is only used to support section attributes.
5047 When this macro is undefined, section attributes are disabled.
5048
5049 @findex OBJC_PROLOGUE
5050 @item OBJC_PROLOGUE
5051 A C statement to output any assembler statements which are required to
5052 precede any Objective C object definitions or message sending. The
5053 statement is executed only when compiling an Objective C program.
5054 @end table
5055
5056 @need 2000
5057 @node Data Output
5058 @subsection Output of Data
5059
5060 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5061 This describes data output.
5062
5063 @table @code
5064 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LONG_DOUBLE
5065 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE
5066 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_FLOAT
5067 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5068 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5069 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5070 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_THREE_QUARTER_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5071 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5072 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5073 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5074 instruction to assemble a floating-point constant of @code{TFmode},
5075 @code{DFmode}, @code{SFmode}, @code{TQFmode}, @code{HFmode}, or
5076 @code{QFmode}, respectively, whose value is @var{value}. @var{value}
5077 will be a C expression of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}. Macros such as
5078 @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE} are useful for writing these
5079 definitions.
5080
5081 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_QUADRUPLE_INT
5082 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE_INT
5083 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_INT
5084 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT
5085 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CHAR
5086 @findex output_addr_const
5087 @item ASM_OUTPUT_QUADRUPLE_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5088 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5089 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5090 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5091 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_CHAR (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5092 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5093 instruction to assemble an integer of 16, 8, 4, 2 or 1 bytes,
5094 respectively, whose value is @var{value}. The argument @var{exp} will
5095 be an RTL expression which represents a constant value. Use
5096 @samp{output_addr_const (@var{stream}, @var{exp})} to output this value
5097 as an assembler expression.@refill
5098
5099 For sizes larger than @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}, if the action of a macro
5100 would be identical to repeatedly calling the macro corresponding to
5101 a size of @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}, once for each word, you need not define
5102 the macro.
5103
5104 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE
5105 @item ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5106 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5107 instruction to assemble a single byte containing the number @var{value}.
5108
5109 @findex ASM_BYTE_OP
5110 @item ASM_BYTE_OP
5111 A C string constant giving the pseudo-op to use for a sequence of
5112 single-byte constants. If this macro is not defined, the default is
5113 @code{"byte"}.
5114
5115 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII
5116 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII (@var{stream}, @var{ptr}, @var{len})
5117 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5118 instruction to assemble a string constant containing the @var{len}
5119 bytes at @var{ptr}. @var{ptr} will be a C expression of type
5120 @code{char *} and @var{len} a C expression of type @code{int}.
5121
5122 If the assembler has a @code{.ascii} pseudo-op as found in the
5123 Berkeley Unix assembler, do not define the macro
5124 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII}.
5125
5126 @findex CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5127 @item CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5128 You may define this macro as a C expression. You should define the
5129 expression to have a non-zero value if GNU CC should output the constant
5130 pool for a function before the code for the function, or a zero value if
5131 GNU CC should output the constant pool after the function. If you do
5132 not define this macro, the usual case, GNU CC will output the constant
5133 pool before the function.
5134
5135 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE
5136 @item ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5137 A C statement to output assembler commands to define the start of the
5138 constant pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving
5139 the name of the function. Should the return type of the function
5140 be required, it can be obtained via @var{fundecl}. @var{size}
5141 is the size, in bytes, of the constant pool that will be written
5142 immediately after this call.
5143
5144 If no constant-pool prefix is required, the usual case, this macro need
5145 not be defined.
5146
5147 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY
5148 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY (@var{file}, @var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{align}, @var{labelno}, @var{jumpto})
5149 A C statement (with or without semicolon) to output a constant in the
5150 constant pool, if it needs special treatment. (This macro need not do
5151 anything for RTL expressions that can be output normally.)
5152
5153 The argument @var{file} is the standard I/O stream to output the
5154 assembler code on. @var{x} is the RTL expression for the constant to
5155 output, and @var{mode} is the machine mode (in case @var{x} is a
5156 @samp{const_int}). @var{align} is the required alignment for the value
5157 @var{x}; you should output an assembler directive to force this much
5158 alignment.
5159
5160 The argument @var{labelno} is a number to use in an internal label for
5161 the address of this pool entry. The definition of this macro is
5162 responsible for outputting the label definition at the proper place.
5163 Here is how to do this:
5164
5165 @example
5166 ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{file}, "LC", @var{labelno});
5167 @end example
5168
5169 When you output a pool entry specially, you should end with a
5170 @code{goto} to the label @var{jumpto}. This will prevent the same pool
5171 entry from being output a second time in the usual manner.
5172
5173 You need not define this macro if it would do nothing.
5174
5175 @findex CONSTANT_AFTER_FUNCTION_P
5176 @item CONSTANT_AFTER_FUNCTION_P (@var{exp})
5177 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if the constant
5178 @var{exp}, of type @code{tree}, should be output after the code for a
5179 function. The compiler will normally output all constants before the
5180 function; you need not define this macro if this is OK.
5181
5182 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE
5183 @item ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5184 A C statement to output assembler commands to at the end of the constant
5185 pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving the name of the
5186 function. Should the return type of the function be required, you can
5187 obtain it via @var{fundecl}. @var{size} is the size, in bytes, of the
5188 constant pool that GNU CC wrote immediately before this call.
5189
5190 If no constant-pool epilogue is required, the usual case, you need not
5191 define this macro.
5192
5193 @findex IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR
5194 @item IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR (@var{C})
5195 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if @var{C} is
5196 used as a logical line separator by the assembler.
5197
5198 If you do not define this macro, the default is that only
5199 the character @samp{;} is treated as a logical line separator.
5200
5201
5202 @findex ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5203 @findex ASM_CLOSE_PAREN
5204 @item ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5205 @itemx ASM_CLOSE_PAREN
5206 These macros are defined as C string constant, describing the syntax
5207 in the assembler for grouping arithmetic expressions. The following
5208 definitions are correct for most assemblers:
5209
5210 @example
5211 #define ASM_OPEN_PAREN "("
5212 #define ASM_CLOSE_PAREN ")"
5213 @end example
5214 @end table
5215
5216 These macros are provided by @file{real.h} for writing the definitions
5217 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE} and the like:
5218
5219 @table @code
5220 @item REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5221 @itemx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5222 @itemx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5223 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE
5224 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE
5225 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE
5226 These translate @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to the target's
5227 floating point representation, and store its bit pattern in the array of
5228 @code{long int} whose address is @var{l}. The number of elements in the
5229 output array is determined by the size of the desired target floating
5230 point data type: 32 bits of it go in each @code{long int} array
5231 element. Each array element holds 32 bits of the result, even if
5232 @code{long int} is wider than 32 bits on the host machine.
5233
5234 The array element values are designed so that you can print them out
5235 using @code{fprintf} in the order they should appear in the target
5236 machine's memory.
5237
5238 @item REAL_VALUE_TO_DECIMAL (@var{x}, @var{format}, @var{string})
5239 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_DECIMAL
5240 This macro converts @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to a
5241 decimal number and stores it as a string into @var{string}.
5242 You must pass, as @var{string}, the address of a long enough block
5243 of space to hold the result.
5244
5245 The argument @var{format} is a @code{printf}-specification that serves
5246 as a suggestion for how to format the output string.
5247 @end table
5248
5249 @node Uninitialized Data
5250 @subsection Output of Uninitialized Variables
5251
5252 Each of the macros in this section is used to do the whole job of
5253 outputting a single uninitialized variable.
5254
5255 @table @code
5256 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON
5257 @item ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5258 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5259 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a common-label named
5260 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5261 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5262
5263 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5264 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5265 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5266
5267 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5268 common global variables are output.
5269
5270 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON
5271 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5272 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} except takes the required alignment as a
5273 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5274 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, and gives you more flexibility in
5275 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5276 as the number of bits.
5277
5278 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON
5279 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5280 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} except that @var{decl} of the
5281 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5282 is not corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GNU CC wil use it
5283 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} and
5284 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON}. Define this macro when you need to see
5285 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5286
5287 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_COMMON
5288 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5289 If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, except that it
5290 is used when @var{name} is shared. If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}
5291 will be used.
5292
5293 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_BSS
5294 @item ASM_OUTPUT_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5295 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5296 @var{stream} the assembler definition of uninitialized global @var{decl} named
5297 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5298 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5299
5300 Try to use function @code{asm_output_bss} defined in @file{varasm.c} when
5301 defining this macro. If unable, use the expression
5302 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name itself;
5303 before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax for defining
5304 the name, and a newline.
5305
5306 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized global
5307 variables are output. This macro exists to properly support languages like
5308 @code{c++} which do not have @code{common} data. However, this macro currently
5309 is not defined for all targets. If this macro and
5310 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} are not defined then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}
5311 or @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} or
5312 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON} is used.
5313
5314 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS
5315 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5316 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS} except takes the required alignment as a
5317 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5318 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS}, and gives you more flexibility in
5319 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5320 as the number of bits.
5321
5322 Try to use function @code{asm_output_aligned_bss} defined in file
5323 @file{varasm.c} when defining this macro.
5324
5325 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_BSS
5326 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5327 If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS}, except that it
5328 is used when @var{name} is shared. If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS}
5329 will be used.
5330
5331 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL
5332 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5333 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5334 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a local-common-label named
5335 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5336 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5337
5338 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5339 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5340 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5341
5342 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5343 static variables are output.
5344
5345 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL
5346 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5347 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} except takes the required alignment as a
5348 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5349 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, and gives you more flexibility in
5350 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5351 as the number of bits.
5352
5353 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL
5354 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5355 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL} except that @var{decl} of the
5356 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5357 is not corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GNU CC wil use it
5358 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DECL} and
5359 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL}. Define this macro when you need to see
5360 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5361
5362
5363 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_LOCAL
5364 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5365 If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, except that it
5366 is used when @var{name} is shared. If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}
5367 will be used.
5368 @end table
5369
5370 @node Label Output
5371 @subsection Output and Generation of Labels
5372
5373 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5374 This is about outputting labels.
5375
5376 @table @code
5377 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL
5378 @findex assemble_name
5379 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5380 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5381 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name}.
5382 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5383 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5384 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5385
5386 @findex ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME
5387 @item ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5388 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5389 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5390 function which is being defined. This macro is responsible for
5391 outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5392 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5393 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5394
5395 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5396 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5397
5398 @findex ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE
5399 @item ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5400 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5401 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a function
5402 which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5403 function. The argument @var{decl} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node
5404 representing the function.
5405
5406 If this macro is not defined, then the function size is not defined.
5407
5408 @findex ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME
5409 @item ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5410 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5411 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of an
5412 initialized variable which is being defined. This macro must output the
5413 label definition (perhaps using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument
5414 @var{decl} is the @code{VAR_DECL} tree node representing the variable.
5415
5416 If this macro is not defined, then the variable name is defined in the
5417 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5418
5419 @findex ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT
5420 @item ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{toplevel}, @var{atend})
5421 A C statement (sans semicolon) to finish up declaring a variable name
5422 once the compiler has processed its initializer fully and thus has had a
5423 chance to determine the size of an array when controlled by an
5424 initializer. This is used on systems where it's necessary to declare
5425 something about the size of the object.
5426
5427 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5428 nothing.
5429
5430 @findex ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL
5431 @item ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5432 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5433 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} global;
5434 that is, available for reference from other files. Use the expression
5435 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5436 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5437 for making that name global, and a newline.
5438
5439 @findex ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL
5440 @item ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL
5441 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5442 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} weak;
5443 that is, available for reference from other files but only used if
5444 no other definition is available. Use the expression
5445 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5446 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5447 for making that name weak, and a newline.
5448
5449 If you don't define this macro, GNU CC will not support weak
5450 symbols and you should not define the @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK} macro.
5451
5452 @findex SUPPORTS_WEAK
5453 @item SUPPORTS_WEAK
5454 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports weak symbols.
5455
5456 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5457 definition. If @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} is defined, the default
5458 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5459 you want to control weak symbol support with a compiler flag such as
5460 @samp{-melf}.
5461
5462 @findex MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY (@var{decl})
5463 @item MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY
5464 A C statement (sans semicolon) to mark @var{decl} to be emitted as a
5465 public symbol such that extra copies in multiple translation units will
5466 be discarded by the linker. Define this macro if your object file
5467 format provides support for this concept, such as the @samp{COMDAT}
5468 section flags in the Microsoft Windows PE/COFF format, and this support
5469 requires changes to @var{decl}, such as putting it in a separate section.
5470
5471 @findex SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5472 @item SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5473 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports one-only
5474 semantics.
5475
5476 If you don't define this macro, @file{varasm.c} provides a default
5477 definition. If @code{MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY} is defined, the default
5478 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5479 you want to control one-only symbol support with a compiler flag, or if
5480 setting the @code{DECL_ONE_ONLY} flag is enough to mark a declaration to
5481 be emitted as one-only.
5482
5483 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL
5484 @item ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name})
5485 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5486 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name of an external
5487 symbol named @var{name} which is referenced in this compilation but
5488 not defined. The value of @var{decl} is the tree node for the
5489 declaration.
5490
5491 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5492 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5493
5494 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL
5495 @item ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL (@var{stream}, @var{symref})
5496 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output on @var{stream} an assembler
5497 pseudo-op to declare a library function name external. The name of the
5498 library function is given by @var{symref}, which has type @code{rtx} and
5499 is a @code{symbol_ref}.
5500
5501 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5502 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5503
5504 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF
5505 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5506 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5507 @var{stream} a reference in assembler syntax to a label named
5508 @var{name}. This should add @samp{_} to the front of the name, if that
5509 is customary on your operating system, as it is in most Berkeley Unix
5510 systems. This macro is used in @code{assemble_name}.
5511
5512 @ignore @c Seems not to exist anymore.
5513 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF_AS_INT
5514 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF_AS_INT (@var{file}, @var{label})
5515 Define this macro for systems that use the program @code{collect2}.
5516 The definition should be a C statement to output a word containing
5517 a reference to the label @var{label}.
5518 @end ignore
5519
5520 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL
5521 @item ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5522 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} a label whose
5523 name is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5524
5525 It is absolutely essential that these labels be distinct from the labels
5526 used for user-level functions and variables. Otherwise, certain programs
5527 will have name conflicts with internal labels.
5528
5529 It is desirable to exclude internal labels from the symbol table of the
5530 object file. Most assemblers have a naming convention for labels that
5531 should be excluded; on many systems, the letter @samp{L} at the
5532 beginning of a label has this effect. You should find out what
5533 convention your system uses, and follow it.
5534
5535 The usual definition of this macro is as follows:
5536
5537 @example
5538 fprintf (@var{stream}, "L%s%d:\n", @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5539 @end example
5540
5541 @findex ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL
5542 @item ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{string}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5543 A C statement to store into the string @var{string} a label whose name
5544 is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5545
5546 This string, when output subsequently by @code{assemble_name}, should
5547 produce the output that @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL} would produce
5548 with the same @var{prefix} and @var{num}.
5549
5550 If the string begins with @samp{*}, then @code{assemble_name} will
5551 output the rest of the string unchanged. It is often convenient for
5552 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} to use @samp{*} in this way. If the
5553 string doesn't start with @samp{*}, then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} gets
5554 to output the string, and may change it. (Of course,
5555 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} is also part of your machine description, so
5556 you should know what it does on your machine.)
5557
5558 @findex ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME
5559 @item ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME (@var{outvar}, @var{name}, @var{number})
5560 A C expression to assign to @var{outvar} (which is a variable of type
5561 @code{char *}) a newly allocated string made from the string
5562 @var{name} and the number @var{number}, with some suitable punctuation
5563 added. Use @code{alloca} to get space for the string.
5564
5565 The string will be used as an argument to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to
5566 produce an assembler label for an internal static variable whose name is
5567 @var{name}. Therefore, the string must be such as to result in valid
5568 assembler code. The argument @var{number} is different each time this
5569 macro is executed; it prevents conflicts between similarly-named
5570 internal static variables in different scopes.
5571
5572 Ideally this string should not be a valid C identifier, to prevent any
5573 conflict with the user's own symbols. Most assemblers allow periods
5574 or percent signs in assembler symbols; putting at least one of these
5575 between the name and the number will suffice.
5576
5577 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DEF
5578 @item ASM_OUTPUT_DEF (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5579 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5580 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{name} to have the value @var{value}.
5581
5582 If SET_ASM_OP is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5583 correct for most systems.
5584
5585 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DEFINE_LABEL_DIFFERENCE_SYMBOL
5586 @item ASM_OUTPUT_DEFINE_LABEL_DIFFERENCE_SYMBOL (@var{stream}, @var{symbol}, @var{high}, @var{low})
5587 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5588 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{symbol} to have a value equal to
5589 the difference of the two symbols @var{high} and @var{low}, i.e.
5590 @var{high} minus @var{low}. GNU CC guarantees that the symbols @var{high}
5591 and @var{low} are already known by the assembler so that the difference
5592 resolves into a constant.
5593
5594 If SET_ASM_OP is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5595 correct for most systems.
5596
5597 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS
5598 @item ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5599 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5600 which defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5601 @var{value}.
5602
5603 Define this macro if the target only supports weak aliases; define
5604 ASM_OUTPUT_DEF instead if possible.
5605
5606 @findex OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL
5607 @item OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL (@var{buf}, @var{is_inst}, @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name}, @var{sel_name})
5608 Define this macro to override the default assembler names used for
5609 Objective C methods.
5610
5611 The default name is a unique method number followed by the name of the
5612 class (e.g.@: @samp{_1_Foo}). For methods in categories, the name of
5613 the category is also included in the assembler name (e.g.@:
5614 @samp{_1_Foo_Bar}).
5615
5616 These names are safe on most systems, but make debugging difficult since
5617 the method's selector is not present in the name. Therefore, particular
5618 systems define other ways of computing names.
5619
5620 @var{buf} is an expression of type @code{char *} which gives you a
5621 buffer in which to store the name; its length is as long as
5622 @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name} and @var{sel_name} put together, plus
5623 50 characters extra.
5624
5625 The argument @var{is_inst} specifies whether the method is an instance
5626 method or a class method; @var{class_name} is the name of the class;
5627 @var{cat_name} is the name of the category (or NULL if the method is not
5628 in a category); and @var{sel_name} is the name of the selector.
5629
5630 On systems where the assembler can handle quoted names, you can use this
5631 macro to provide more human-readable names.
5632 @end table
5633
5634 @node Initialization
5635 @subsection How Initialization Functions Are Handled
5636 @cindex initialization routines
5637 @cindex termination routines
5638 @cindex constructors, output of
5639 @cindex destructors, output of
5640
5641 The compiled code for certain languages includes @dfn{constructors}
5642 (also called @dfn{initialization routines})---functions to initialize
5643 data in the program when the program is started. These functions need
5644 to be called before the program is ``started''---that is to say, before
5645 @code{main} is called.
5646
5647 Compiling some languages generates @dfn{destructors} (also called
5648 @dfn{termination routines}) that should be called when the program
5649 terminates.
5650
5651 To make the initialization and termination functions work, the compiler
5652 must output something in the assembler code to cause those functions to
5653 be called at the appropriate time. When you port the compiler to a new
5654 system, you need to specify how to do this.
5655
5656 There are two major ways that GCC currently supports the execution of
5657 initialization and termination functions. Each way has two variants.
5658 Much of the structure is common to all four variations.
5659
5660 @findex __CTOR_LIST__
5661 @findex __DTOR_LIST__
5662 The linker must build two lists of these functions---a list of
5663 initialization functions, called @code{__CTOR_LIST__}, and a list of
5664 termination functions, called @code{__DTOR_LIST__}.
5665
5666 Each list always begins with an ignored function pointer (which may hold
5667 0, @minus{}1, or a count of the function pointers after it, depending on
5668 the environment). This is followed by a series of zero or more function
5669 pointers to constructors (or destructors), followed by a function
5670 pointer containing zero.
5671
5672 Depending on the operating system and its executable file format, either
5673 @file{crtstuff.c} or @file{libgcc2.c} traverses these lists at startup
5674 time and exit time. Constructors are called in reverse order of the
5675 list; destructors in forward order.
5676
5677 The best way to handle static constructors works only for object file
5678 formats which provide arbitrarily-named sections. A section is set
5679 aside for a list of constructors, and another for a list of destructors.
5680 Traditionally these are called @samp{.ctors} and @samp{.dtors}. Each
5681 object file that defines an initialization function also puts a word in
5682 the constructor section to point to that function. The linker
5683 accumulates all these words into one contiguous @samp{.ctors} section.
5684 Termination functions are handled similarly.
5685
5686 To use this method, you need appropriate definitions of the macros
5687 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR}. Usually
5688 you can get them by including @file{svr4.h}.
5689
5690 When arbitrary sections are available, there are two variants, depending
5691 upon how the code in @file{crtstuff.c} is called. On systems that
5692 support an @dfn{init} section which is executed at program startup,
5693 parts of @file{crtstuff.c} are compiled into that section. The
5694 program is linked by the @code{gcc} driver like this:
5695
5696 @example
5697 ld -o @var{output_file} crtbegin.o @dots{} crtend.o -lgcc
5698 @end example
5699
5700 The head of a function (@code{__do_global_ctors}) appears in the init
5701 section of @file{crtbegin.o}; the remainder of the function appears in
5702 the init section of @file{crtend.o}. The linker will pull these two
5703 parts of the section together, making a whole function. If any of the
5704 user's object files linked into the middle of it contribute code, then that
5705 code will be executed as part of the body of @code{__do_global_ctors}.
5706
5707 To use this variant, you must define the @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5708 macro properly.
5709
5710 If no init section is available, do not define
5711 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. Then @code{__do_global_ctors} is built into
5712 the text section like all other functions, and resides in
5713 @file{libgcc.a}. When GCC compiles any function called @code{main}, it
5714 inserts a procedure call to @code{__main} as the first executable code
5715 after the function prologue. The @code{__main} function, also defined
5716 in @file{libgcc2.c}, simply calls @file{__do_global_ctors}.
5717
5718 In file formats that don't support arbitrary sections, there are again
5719 two variants. In the simplest variant, the GNU linker (GNU @code{ld})
5720 and an `a.out' format must be used. In this case,
5721 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} is defined to produce a @code{.stabs}
5722 entry of type @samp{N_SETT}, referencing the name @code{__CTOR_LIST__},
5723 and with the address of the void function containing the initialization
5724 code as its value. The GNU linker recognizes this as a request to add
5725 the value to a ``set''; the values are accumulated, and are eventually
5726 placed in the executable as a vector in the format described above, with
5727 a leading (ignored) count and a trailing zero element.
5728 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR} is handled similarly. Since no init
5729 section is available, the absence of @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} causes
5730 the compilation of @code{main} to call @code{__main} as above, starting
5731 the initialization process.
5732
5733 The last variant uses neither arbitrary sections nor the GNU linker.
5734 This is preferable when you want to do dynamic linking and when using
5735 file formats which the GNU linker does not support, such as `ECOFF'. In
5736 this case, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} does not produce an
5737 @code{N_SETT} symbol; initialization and termination functions are
5738 recognized simply by their names. This requires an extra program in the
5739 linkage step, called @code{collect2}. This program pretends to be the
5740 linker, for use with GNU CC; it does its job by running the ordinary
5741 linker, but also arranges to include the vectors of initialization and
5742 termination functions. These functions are called via @code{__main} as
5743 described above.
5744
5745 Choosing among these configuration options has been simplified by a set
5746 of operating-system-dependent files in the @file{config} subdirectory.
5747 These files define all of the relevant parameters. Usually it is
5748 sufficient to include one into your specific machine-dependent
5749 configuration file. These files are:
5750
5751 @table @file
5752 @item aoutos.h
5753 For operating systems using the `a.out' format.
5754
5755 @item next.h
5756 For operating systems using the `MachO' format.
5757
5758 @item svr3.h
5759 For System V Release 3 and similar systems using `COFF' format.
5760
5761 @item svr4.h
5762 For System V Release 4 and similar systems using `ELF' format.
5763
5764 @item vms.h
5765 For the VMS operating system.
5766 @end table
5767
5768 @ifinfo
5769 The following section describes the specific macros that control and
5770 customize the handling of initialization and termination functions.
5771 @end ifinfo
5772
5773 @node Macros for Initialization
5774 @subsection Macros Controlling Initialization Routines
5775
5776 Here are the macros that control how the compiler handles initialization
5777 and termination functions:
5778
5779 @table @code
5780 @findex INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
5781 @item INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
5782 If defined, a C string constant for the assembler operation to identify
5783 the following data as initialization code. If not defined, GNU CC will
5784 assume such a section does not exist. When you are using special
5785 sections for initialization and termination functions, this macro also
5786 controls how @file{crtstuff.c} and @file{libgcc2.c} arrange to run the
5787 initialization functions.
5788
5789 @item HAS_INIT_SECTION
5790 @findex HAS_INIT_SECTION
5791 If defined, @code{main} will not call @code{__main} as described above.
5792 This macro should be defined for systems that control the contents of the
5793 init section on a symbol-by-symbol basis, such as OSF/1, and should not
5794 be defined explicitly for systems that support
5795 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
5796
5797 @item LD_INIT_SWITCH
5798 @findex LD_INIT_SWITCH
5799 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
5800 the following symbol is an initialization routine.
5801
5802 @item LD_FINI_SWITCH
5803 @findex LD_FINI_SWITCH
5804 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
5805 the following symbol is a finalization routine.
5806
5807 @item INVOKE__main
5808 @findex INVOKE__main
5809 If defined, @code{main} will call @code{__main} despite the presence of
5810 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. This macro should be defined for systems
5811 where the init section is not actually run automatically, but is still
5812 useful for collecting the lists of constructors and destructors.
5813
5814 @item ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5815 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR
5816 Define this macro as a C statement to output on the stream @var{stream}
5817 the assembler code to arrange to call the function named @var{name} at
5818 initialization time.
5819
5820 Assume that @var{name} is the name of a C function generated
5821 automatically by the compiler. This function takes no arguments. Use
5822 the function @code{assemble_name} to output the name @var{name}; this
5823 performs any system-specific syntactic transformations such as adding an
5824 underscore.
5825
5826 If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output to arrange to
5827 call the function. This is correct when the function will be called in
5828 some other manner---for example, by means of the @code{collect2} program,
5829 which looks through the symbol table to find these functions by their
5830 names.
5831
5832 @item ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5833 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR
5834 This is like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} but used for termination
5835 functions rather than initialization functions.
5836 @end table
5837
5838 If your system uses @code{collect2} as the means of processing
5839 constructors, then that program normally uses @code{nm} to scan an
5840 object file for constructor functions to be called. On certain kinds of
5841 systems, you can define these macros to make @code{collect2} work faster
5842 (and, in some cases, make it work at all):
5843
5844 @table @code
5845 @findex OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
5846 @item OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
5847 Define this macro if the system uses COFF (Common Object File Format)
5848 object files, so that @code{collect2} can assume this format and scan
5849 object files directly for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
5850
5851 @findex OBJECT_FORMAT_ROSE
5852 @item OBJECT_FORMAT_ROSE
5853 Define this macro if the system uses ROSE format object files, so that
5854 @code{collect2} can assume this format and scan object files directly
5855 for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
5856
5857 These macros are effective only in a native compiler; @code{collect2} as
5858 part of a cross compiler always uses @code{nm} for the target machine.
5859
5860 @findex REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
5861 @item REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
5862 Define this macro as a C string constant containing the file name to use
5863 to execute @code{nm}. The default is to search the path normally for
5864 @code{nm}.
5865
5866 If your system supports shared libraries and has a program to list the
5867 dynamic dependencies of a given library or executable, you can define
5868 these macros to enable support for running initialization and
5869 termination functions in shared libraries:
5870
5871 @findex LDD_SUFFIX
5872 @item LDD_SUFFIX
5873 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the name of the
5874 program which lists dynamic dependencies, like @code{"ldd"} under SunOS 4.
5875
5876 @findex PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT
5877 @item PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT (@var{PTR})
5878 Define this macro to be C code that extracts filenames from the output
5879 of the program denoted by @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. @var{PTR} is a variable
5880 of type @code{char *} that points to the beginning of a line of output
5881 from @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. If the line lists a dynamic dependency, the
5882 code must advance @var{PTR} to the beginning of the filename on that
5883 line. Otherwise, it must set @var{PTR} to @code{NULL}.
5884
5885 @end table
5886
5887 @node Instruction Output
5888 @subsection Output of Assembler Instructions
5889
5890 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5891 This describes assembler instruction output.
5892
5893 @table @code
5894 @findex REGISTER_NAMES
5895 @item REGISTER_NAMES
5896 A C initializer containing the assembler's names for the machine
5897 registers, each one as a C string constant. This is what translates
5898 register numbers in the compiler into assembler language.
5899
5900 @findex ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
5901 @item ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
5902 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a name
5903 and a register number. This macro defines additional names for hard
5904 registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in declarations to refer
5905 to registers using alternate names.
5906
5907 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE
5908 @item ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE (@var{stream}, @var{ptr})
5909 Define this macro if you are using an unusual assembler that
5910 requires different names for the machine instructions.
5911
5912 The definition is a C statement or statements which output an
5913 assembler instruction opcode to the stdio stream @var{stream}. The
5914 macro-operand @var{ptr} is a variable of type @code{char *} which
5915 points to the opcode name in its ``internal'' form---the form that is
5916 written in the machine description. The definition should output the
5917 opcode name to @var{stream}, performing any translation you desire, and
5918 increment the variable @var{ptr} to point at the end of the opcode
5919 so that it will not be output twice.
5920
5921 In fact, your macro definition may process less than the entire opcode
5922 name, or more than the opcode name; but if you want to process text
5923 that includes @samp{%}-sequences to substitute operands, you must take
5924 care of the substitution yourself. Just be sure to increment
5925 @var{ptr} over whatever text should not be output normally.
5926
5927 @findex recog_operand
5928 If you need to look at the operand values, they can be found as the
5929 elements of @code{recog_operand}.
5930
5931 If the macro definition does nothing, the instruction is output
5932 in the usual way.
5933
5934 @findex FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN
5935 @item FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN (@var{insn}, @var{opvec}, @var{noperands})
5936 If defined, a C statement to be executed just prior to the output of
5937 assembler code for @var{insn}, to modify the extracted operands so
5938 they will be output differently.
5939
5940 Here the argument @var{opvec} is the vector containing the operands
5941 extracted from @var{insn}, and @var{noperands} is the number of
5942 elements of the vector which contain meaningful data for this insn.
5943 The contents of this vector are what will be used to convert the insn
5944 template into assembler code, so you can change the assembler output
5945 by changing the contents of the vector.
5946
5947 This macro is useful when various assembler syntaxes share a single
5948 file of instruction patterns; by defining this macro differently, you
5949 can cause a large class of instructions to be output differently (such
5950 as with rearranged operands). Naturally, variations in assembler
5951 syntax affecting individual insn patterns ought to be handled by
5952 writing conditional output routines in those patterns.
5953
5954 If this macro is not defined, it is equivalent to a null statement.
5955
5956 @findex FINAL_PRESCAN_LABEL
5957 @item FINAL_PRESCAN_LABEL
5958 If defined, @code{FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN} will be called on each
5959 @code{CODE_LABEL}. In that case, @var{opvec} will be a null pointer and
5960 @var{noperands} will be zero.
5961
5962 @findex PRINT_OPERAND
5963 @item PRINT_OPERAND (@var{stream}, @var{x}, @var{code})
5964 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
5965 assembler syntax for an instruction operand @var{x}. @var{x} is an
5966 RTL expression.
5967
5968 @var{code} is a value that can be used to specify one of several ways
5969 of printing the operand. It is used when identical operands must be
5970 printed differently depending on the context. @var{code} comes from
5971 the @samp{%} specification that was used to request printing of the
5972 operand. If the specification was just @samp{%@var{digit}} then
5973 @var{code} is 0; if the specification was @samp{%@var{ltr}
5974 @var{digit}} then @var{code} is the ASCII code for @var{ltr}.
5975
5976 @findex reg_names
5977 If @var{x} is a register, this macro should print the register's name.
5978 The names can be found in an array @code{reg_names} whose type is
5979 @code{char *[]}. @code{reg_names} is initialized from
5980 @code{REGISTER_NAMES}.
5981
5982 When the machine description has a specification @samp{%@var{punct}}
5983 (a @samp{%} followed by a punctuation character), this macro is called
5984 with a null pointer for @var{x} and the punctuation character for
5985 @var{code}.
5986
5987 @findex PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P
5988 @item PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P (@var{code})
5989 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{code} is a valid
5990 punctuation character for use in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro. If
5991 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} is not defined, it means that no
5992 punctuation characters (except for the standard one, @samp{%}) are used
5993 in this way.
5994
5995 @findex PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS
5996 @item PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS (@var{stream}, @var{x})
5997 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
5998 assembler syntax for an instruction operand that is a memory reference
5999 whose address is @var{x}. @var{x} is an RTL expression.
6000
6001 @cindex @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} usage
6002 On some machines, the syntax for a symbolic address depends on the
6003 section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the macro
6004 @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
6005 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. @xref{Assembler Format}.
6006
6007 @findex DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND
6008 @findex dbr_sequence_length
6009 @item DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND(@var{file})
6010 A C statement, to be executed after all slot-filler instructions have
6011 been output. If necessary, call @code{dbr_sequence_length} to
6012 determine the number of slots filled in a sequence (zero if not
6013 currently outputting a sequence), to decide how many no-ops to output,
6014 or whatever.
6015
6016 Don't define this macro if it has nothing to do, but it is helpful in
6017 reading assembly output if the extent of the delay sequence is made
6018 explicit (e.g. with white space).
6019
6020 @findex final_sequence
6021 Note that output routines for instructions with delay slots must be
6022 prepared to deal with not being output as part of a sequence (i.e.
6023 when the scheduling pass is not run, or when no slot fillers could be
6024 found.) The variable @code{final_sequence} is null when not
6025 processing a sequence, otherwise it contains the @code{sequence} rtx
6026 being output.
6027
6028 @findex REGISTER_PREFIX
6029 @findex LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6030 @findex USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6031 @findex IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6032 @findex asm_fprintf
6033 @item REGISTER_PREFIX
6034 @itemx LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6035 @itemx USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6036 @itemx IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6037 If defined, C string expressions to be used for the @samp{%R}, @samp{%L},
6038 @samp{%U}, and @samp{%I} options of @code{asm_fprintf} (see
6039 @file{final.c}). These are useful when a single @file{md} file must
6040 support multiple assembler formats. In that case, the various @file{tm.h}
6041 files can define these macros differently.
6042
6043 @findex ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6044 @item ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6045 If your target supports multiple dialects of assembler language (such as
6046 different opcodes), define this macro as a C expression that gives the
6047 numeric index of the assembler language dialect to use, with zero as the
6048 first variant.
6049
6050 If this macro is defined, you may use constructs of the form
6051 @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@dots{}@}} in the output
6052 templates of patterns (@pxref{Output Template}) or in the first argument
6053 of @code{asm_fprintf}. This construct outputs @samp{option0},
6054 @samp{option1} or @samp{option2}, etc., if the value of
6055 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is zero, one or two, etc. Any special
6056 characters within these strings retain their usual meaning.
6057
6058 If you do not define this macro, the characters @samp{@{}, @samp{|} and
6059 @samp{@}} do not have any special meaning when used in templates or
6060 operands to @code{asm_fprintf}.
6061
6062 Define the macros @code{REGISTER_PREFIX}, @code{LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX},
6063 @code{USER_LABEL_PREFIX} and @code{IMMEDIATE_PREFIX} if you can express
6064 the variations in assembler language syntax with that mechanism. Define
6065 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} and use the @samp{@{option0|option1@}} syntax
6066 if the syntax variant are larger and involve such things as different
6067 opcodes or operand order.
6068
6069 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH
6070 @item ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6071 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6072 which will push hard register number @var{regno} onto the stack.
6073 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6074 profiling.
6075
6076 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP
6077 @item ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6078 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6079 which will pop hard register number @var{regno} off of the stack.
6080 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6081 profiling.
6082 @end table
6083
6084 @node Dispatch Tables
6085 @subsection Output of Dispatch Tables
6086
6087 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6088 This concerns dispatch tables.
6089
6090 @table @code
6091 @cindex dispatch table
6092 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT
6093 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{body}, @var{value}, @var{rel})
6094 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6095 pseudo-instruction to generate a difference between two labels.
6096 @var{value} and @var{rel} are the numbers of two internal labels. The
6097 definitions of these labels are output using
6098 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}, and they must be printed in the same
6099 way here. For example,
6100
6101 @example
6102 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d-L%d\n",
6103 @var{value}, @var{rel})
6104 @end example
6105
6106 You must provide this macro on machines where the addresses in a
6107 dispatch table are relative to the table's own address. If defined, GNU
6108 CC will also use this macro on all machines when producing PIC.
6109 @var{body} is the body of the ADDR_DIFF_VEC; it is provided so that the
6110 mode and flags can be read.
6111
6112 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT
6113 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
6114 This macro should be provided on machines where the addresses
6115 in a dispatch table are absolute.
6116
6117 The definition should be a C statement to output to the stdio stream
6118 @var{stream} an assembler pseudo-instruction to generate a reference to
6119 a label. @var{value} is the number of an internal label whose
6120 definition is output using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}.
6121 For example,
6122
6123 @example
6124 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d\n", @var{value})
6125 @end example
6126
6127 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL
6128 @item ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6129 Define this if the label before a jump-table needs to be output
6130 specially. The first three arguments are the same as for
6131 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}; the fourth argument is the
6132 jump-table which follows (a @code{jump_insn} containing an
6133 @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec}).
6134
6135 This feature is used on system V to output a @code{swbeg} statement
6136 for the table.
6137
6138 If this macro is not defined, these labels are output with
6139 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}.
6140
6141 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END
6142 @item ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END (@var{stream}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6143 Define this if something special must be output at the end of a
6144 jump-table. The definition should be a C statement to be executed
6145 after the assembler code for the table is written. It should write
6146 the appropriate code to stdio stream @var{stream}. The argument
6147 @var{table} is the jump-table insn, and @var{num} is the label-number
6148 of the preceding label.
6149
6150 If this macro is not defined, nothing special is output at the end of
6151 the jump-table.
6152 @end table
6153
6154 @node Exception Region Output
6155 @subsection Assembler Commands for Exception Regions
6156
6157 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6158
6159 This describes commands marking the start and the end of an exception
6160 region.
6161
6162 @table @code
6163 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_BEG
6164 @item ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_BEG ()
6165 A C expression to output text to mark the start of an exception region.
6166
6167 This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6168
6169 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_END
6170 @item ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_END ()
6171 A C expression to output text to mark the end of an exception region.
6172
6173 This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6174
6175 @findex EXCEPTION_SECTION
6176 @item EXCEPTION_SECTION ()
6177 A C expression to switch to the section in which the main
6178 exception table is to be placed (@pxref{Sections}). The default is a
6179 section named @code{.gcc_except_table} on machines that support named
6180 sections via @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SECTION_NAME}, otherwise if @samp{-fpic}
6181 or @samp{-fPIC} is in effect, the @code{data_section}, otherwise the
6182 @code{readonly_data_section}.
6183
6184 @findex EH_FRAME_SECTION_ASM_OP
6185 @item EH_FRAME_SECTION_ASM_OP
6186 If defined, a C string constant for the assembler operation to switch to
6187 the section for exception handling frame unwind information. If not
6188 defined, GNU CC will provide a default definition if the target supports
6189 named sections. @file{crtstuff.c} uses this macro to switch to the
6190 appropriate section.
6191
6192 You should define this symbol if your target supports DWARF 2 frame
6193 unwind information and the default definition does not work.
6194
6195 @findex OMIT_EH_TABLE
6196 @item OMIT_EH_TABLE ()
6197 A C expression that is nonzero if the normal exception table output
6198 should be omitted.
6199
6200 This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6201
6202 @findex EH_TABLE_LOOKUP
6203 @item EH_TABLE_LOOKUP ()
6204 Alternate runtime support for looking up an exception at runtime and
6205 finding the associated handler, if the default method won't work.
6206
6207 This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6208
6209 @findex DOESNT_NEED_UNWINDER
6210 @item DOESNT_NEED_UNWINDER
6211 A C expression that decides whether or not the current function needs to
6212 have a function unwinder generated for it. See the file @code{except.c}
6213 for details on when to define this, and how.
6214
6215 @findex MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6216 @item MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6217 An rtx used to mask the return address found via RETURN_ADDR_RTX, so
6218 that it does not contain any extraneous set bits in it.
6219
6220 @findex DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6221 @item DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6222 Define this macro to 0 if your target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6223 information, but it does not yet work with exception handling.
6224 Otherwise, if your target supports this information (if it defines
6225 @samp{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either @samp{UNALIGNED_INT_ASM_OP}
6226 or @samp{OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF}), GCC will provide a default definition of
6227 1.
6228
6229 If this macro is defined to 1, the DWARF 2 unwinder will be the default
6230 exception handling mechanism; otherwise, setjmp/longjmp will be used by
6231 default.
6232
6233 If this macro is defined to anything, the DWARF 2 unwinder will be used
6234 instead of inline unwinders and __unwind_function in the non-setjmp case.
6235
6236 @end table
6237
6238 @node Alignment Output
6239 @subsection Assembler Commands for Alignment
6240
6241 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6242 This describes commands for alignment.
6243
6244 @table @code
6245 @findex LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER
6246 @item LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER (@var{label})
6247 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6248 a BARRIER.
6249
6250 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6251 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6252 define the macro.
6253
6254 @findex LOOP_ALIGN
6255 @item LOOP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6256 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6257 a NOTE_INSN_LOOP_BEG note.
6258
6259 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6260 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6261 define the macro.
6262
6263 @findex LABEL_ALIGN
6264 @item LABEL_ALIGN (@var{label})
6265 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}.
6266 If LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER / LOOP_ALIGN specify a different alignment,
6267 the maximum of the specified values is used.
6268
6269 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP
6270 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (@var{stream}, @var{nbytes})
6271 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6272 instruction to advance the location counter by @var{nbytes} bytes.
6273 Those bytes should be zero when loaded. @var{nbytes} will be a C
6274 expression of type @code{int}.
6275
6276 @findex ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6277 @item ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6278 Define this macro if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP} should not be used in the
6279 text section because it fails to put zeros in the bytes that are skipped.
6280 This is true on many Unix systems, where the pseudo--op to skip bytes
6281 produces no-op instructions rather than zeros when used in the text
6282 section.
6283
6284 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN
6285 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6286 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6287 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6288 @var{power} bytes. @var{power} will be a C expression of type @code{int}.
6289 @end table
6290
6291 @need 3000
6292 @node Debugging Info
6293 @section Controlling Debugging Information Format
6294
6295 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6296 This describes how to specify debugging information.
6297
6298 @menu
6299 * All Debuggers:: Macros that affect all debugging formats uniformly.
6300 * DBX Options:: Macros enabling specific options in DBX format.
6301 * DBX Hooks:: Hook macros for varying DBX format.
6302 * File Names and DBX:: Macros controlling output of file names in DBX format.
6303 * SDB and DWARF:: Macros for SDB (COFF) and DWARF formats.
6304 @end menu
6305
6306 @node All Debuggers
6307 @subsection Macros Affecting All Debugging Formats
6308
6309 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6310 These macros affect all debugging formats.
6311
6312 @table @code
6313 @findex DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER
6314 @item DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})
6315 A C expression that returns the DBX register number for the compiler
6316 register number @var{regno}. In simple cases, the value of this
6317 expression may be @var{regno} itself. But sometimes there are some
6318 registers that the compiler knows about and DBX does not, or vice
6319 versa. In such cases, some register may need to have one number in
6320 the compiler and another for DBX.
6321
6322 If two registers have consecutive numbers inside GNU CC, and they can be
6323 used as a pair to hold a multiword value, then they @emph{must} have
6324 consecutive numbers after renumbering with @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER}.
6325 Otherwise, debuggers will be unable to access such a pair, because they
6326 expect register pairs to be consecutive in their own numbering scheme.
6327
6328 If you find yourself defining @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER} in way that
6329 does not preserve register pairs, then what you must do instead is
6330 redefine the actual register numbering scheme.
6331
6332 @findex DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET
6333 @item DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET (@var{x})
6334 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an automatic
6335 variable having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The default
6336 computation assumes that @var{x} is based on the frame-pointer and
6337 gives the offset from the frame-pointer. This is required for targets
6338 that produce debugging output for DBX or COFF-style debugging output
6339 for SDB and allow the frame-pointer to be eliminated when the
6340 @samp{-g} options is used.
6341
6342 @findex DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET
6343 @item DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET (@var{offset}, @var{x})
6344 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an argument
6345 having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The nominal offset is
6346 @var{offset}.
6347
6348 @findex PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6349 @item PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6350 A C expression that returns the type of debugging output GNU CC should
6351 produce when the user specifies just @samp{-g}. Define
6352 this if you have arranged for GNU CC to support more than one format of
6353 debugging output. Currently, the allowable values are @code{DBX_DEBUG},
6354 @code{SDB_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}, and
6355 @code{XCOFF_DEBUG}.
6356
6357 When the user specifies @samp{-ggdb}, GNU CC normally also uses the
6358 value of this macro to select the debugging output format, but with two
6359 exceptions. If @code{DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO} is defined and
6360 @code{LINKER_DOES_NOT_WORK_WITH_DWARF2} is not defined, GNU CC uses the
6361 value @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}. Otherwise, if @code{DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO} is
6362 defined, GNU CC uses @code{DBX_DEBUG}.
6363
6364 The value of this macro only affects the default debugging output; the
6365 user can always get a specific type of output by using @samp{-gstabs},
6366 @samp{-gcoff}, @samp{-gdwarf-1}, @samp{-gdwarf-2}, or @samp{-gxcoff}.
6367 @end table
6368
6369 @node DBX Options
6370 @subsection Specific Options for DBX Output
6371
6372 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6373 These are specific options for DBX output.
6374
6375 @table @code
6376 @findex DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6377 @item DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6378 Define this macro if GNU CC should produce debugging output for DBX
6379 in response to the @samp{-g} option.
6380
6381 @findex XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6382 @item XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6383 Define this macro if GNU CC should produce XCOFF format debugging output
6384 in response to the @samp{-g} option. This is a variant of DBX format.
6385
6386 @findex DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6387 @item DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6388 Define this macro to control whether GNU CC should by default generate
6389 GDB's extended version of DBX debugging information (assuming DBX-format
6390 debugging information is enabled at all). If you don't define the
6391 macro, the default is 1: always generate the extended information
6392 if there is any occasion to.
6393
6394 @findex DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6395 @item DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6396 Define this macro if all @code{.stabs} commands should be output while
6397 in the text section.
6398
6399 @findex ASM_STABS_OP
6400 @item ASM_STABS_OP
6401 A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
6402 @code{.stabs} to define an ordinary debugging symbol. If you don't
6403 define this macro, @code{.stabs} is used. This macro applies only to
6404 DBX debugging information format.
6405
6406 @findex ASM_STABD_OP
6407 @item ASM_STABD_OP
6408 A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
6409 @code{.stabd} to define a debugging symbol whose value is the current
6410 location. If you don't define this macro, @code{.stabd} is used.
6411 This macro applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6412
6413 @findex ASM_STABN_OP
6414 @item ASM_STABN_OP
6415 A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
6416 @code{.stabn} to define a debugging symbol with no name. If you don't
6417 define this macro, @code{.stabn} is used. This macro applies only to
6418 DBX debugging information format.
6419
6420 @findex DBX_NO_XREFS
6421 @item DBX_NO_XREFS
6422 Define this macro if DBX on your system does not support the construct
6423 @samp{xs@var{tagname}}. On some systems, this construct is used to
6424 describe a forward reference to a structure named @var{tagname}.
6425 On other systems, this construct is not supported at all.
6426
6427 @findex DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6428 @item DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6429 A symbol name in DBX-format debugging information is normally
6430 continued (split into two separate @code{.stabs} directives) when it
6431 exceeds a certain length (by default, 80 characters). On some
6432 operating systems, DBX requires this splitting; on others, splitting
6433 must not be done. You can inhibit splitting by defining this macro
6434 with the value zero. You can override the default splitting-length by
6435 defining this macro as an expression for the length you desire.
6436
6437 @findex DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6438 @item DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6439 Normally continuation is indicated by adding a @samp{\} character to
6440 the end of a @code{.stabs} string when a continuation follows. To use
6441 a different character instead, define this macro as a character
6442 constant for the character you want to use. Do not define this macro
6443 if backslash is correct for your system.
6444
6445 @findex DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6446 @item DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6447 Define this macro if it is necessary to go to the data section before
6448 outputting the @samp{.stabs} pseudo-op for a non-global static
6449 variable.
6450
6451 @findex DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6452 @item DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6453 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6454 for a typedef. The default is @code{N_LSYM}.
6455
6456 @findex DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6457 @item DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6458 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6459 for a static variable located in the text section. DBX format does not
6460 provide any ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_FUN}.
6461
6462 @findex DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6463 @item DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6464 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6465 for a parameter passed in registers. DBX format does not provide any
6466 ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_RSYM}.
6467
6468 @findex DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6469 @item DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6470 The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a parameter
6471 passed in registers. DBX format does not customarily provide any way to
6472 do this. The default is @code{'P'}.
6473
6474 @findex DBX_MEMPARM_STABS_LETTER
6475 @item DBX_MEMPARM_STABS_LETTER
6476 The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a stack
6477 parameter. The default is @code{'p'}.
6478
6479 @findex DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6480 @item DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6481 Define this macro if the DBX information for a function and its
6482 arguments should precede the assembler code for the function. Normally,
6483 in DBX format, the debugging information entirely follows the assembler
6484 code.
6485
6486 @findex DBX_LBRAC_FIRST
6487 @item DBX_LBRAC_FIRST
6488 Define this macro if the @code{N_LBRAC} symbol for a block should
6489 precede the debugging information for variables and functions defined in
6490 that block. Normally, in DBX format, the @code{N_LBRAC} symbol comes
6491 first.
6492
6493 @findex DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6494 @item DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6495 Define this macro if the value of a symbol describing the scope of a
6496 block (@code{N_LBRAC} or @code{N_RBRAC}) should be relative to the start
6497 of the enclosing function. Normally, GNU C uses an absolute address.
6498
6499 @findex DBX_USE_BINCL
6500 @item DBX_USE_BINCL
6501 Define this macro if GNU C should generate @code{N_BINCL} and
6502 @code{N_EINCL} stabs for included header files, as on Sun systems. This
6503 macro also directs GNU C to output a type number as a pair of a file
6504 number and a type number within the file. Normally, GNU C does not
6505 generate @code{N_BINCL} or @code{N_EINCL} stabs, and it outputs a single
6506 number for a type number.
6507 @end table
6508
6509 @node DBX Hooks
6510 @subsection Open-Ended Hooks for DBX Format
6511
6512 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6513 These are hooks for DBX format.
6514
6515 @table @code
6516 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC
6517 @item DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6518 Define this macro to say how to output to @var{stream} the debugging
6519 information for the start of a scope level for variable names. The
6520 argument @var{name} is the name of an assembler symbol (for use with
6521 @code{assemble_name}) whose value is the address where the scope begins.
6522
6523 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_RBRAC
6524 @item DBX_OUTPUT_RBRAC (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6525 Like @code{DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC}, but for the end of a scope level.
6526
6527 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_ENUM
6528 @item DBX_OUTPUT_ENUM (@var{stream}, @var{type})
6529 Define this macro if the target machine requires special handling to
6530 output an enumeration type. The definition should be a C statement
6531 (sans semicolon) to output the appropriate information to @var{stream}
6532 for the type @var{type}.
6533
6534 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_END
6535 @item DBX_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_END (@var{stream}, @var{function})
6536 Define this macro if the target machine requires special output at the
6537 end of the debugging information for a function. The definition should
6538 be a C statement (sans semicolon) to output the appropriate information
6539 to @var{stream}. @var{function} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} node for
6540 the function.
6541
6542 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES
6543 @item DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES (@var{syms})
6544 Define this macro if you need to control the order of output of the
6545 standard data types at the beginning of compilation. The argument
6546 @var{syms} is a @code{tree} which is a chain of all the predefined
6547 global symbols, including names of data types.
6548
6549 Normally, DBX output starts with definitions of the types for integers
6550 and characters, followed by all the other predefined types of the
6551 particular language in no particular order.
6552
6553 On some machines, it is necessary to output different particular types
6554 first. To do this, define @code{DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES} to output
6555 those symbols in the necessary order. Any predefined types that you
6556 don't explicitly output will be output afterward in no particular order.
6557
6558 Be careful not to define this macro so that it works only for C. There
6559 are no global variables to access most of the built-in types, because
6560 another language may have another set of types. The way to output a
6561 particular type is to look through @var{syms} to see if you can find it.
6562 Here is an example:
6563
6564 @smallexample
6565 @{
6566 tree decl;
6567 for (decl = syms; decl; decl = TREE_CHAIN (decl))
6568 if (!strcmp (IDENTIFIER_POINTER (DECL_NAME (decl)),
6569 "long int"))
6570 dbxout_symbol (decl);
6571 @dots{}
6572 @}
6573 @end smallexample
6574
6575 @noindent
6576 This does nothing if the expected type does not exist.
6577
6578 See the function @code{init_decl_processing} in @file{c-decl.c} to find
6579 the names to use for all the built-in C types.
6580
6581 Here is another way of finding a particular type:
6582
6583 @c this is still overfull. --mew 10feb93
6584 @smallexample
6585 @{
6586 tree decl;
6587 for (decl = syms; decl; decl = TREE_CHAIN (decl))
6588 if (TREE_CODE (decl) == TYPE_DECL
6589 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (decl))
6590 == INTEGER_CST)
6591 && TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (decl)) == 16
6592 && TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (decl)))
6593 @group
6594 /* @r{This must be @code{unsigned short}.} */
6595 dbxout_symbol (decl);
6596 @dots{}
6597 @}
6598 @end group
6599 @end smallexample
6600
6601 @findex NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
6602 @item NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
6603 Some stabs encapsulation formats (in particular ECOFF), cannot handle the
6604 @code{.stabs "",N_FUN,,0,0,Lscope-function-1} gdb dbx extention construct.
6605 On those machines, define this macro to turn this feature off without
6606 disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6607
6608 @end table
6609
6610 @node File Names and DBX
6611 @subsection File Names in DBX Format
6612
6613 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6614 This describes file names in DBX format.
6615
6616 @table @code
6617 @findex DBX_WORKING_DIRECTORY
6618 @item DBX_WORKING_DIRECTORY
6619 Define this if DBX wants to have the current directory recorded in each
6620 object file.
6621
6622 Note that the working directory is always recorded if GDB extensions are
6623 enabled.
6624
6625 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME
6626 @item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6627 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6628 @var{stream} which indicates that file @var{name} is the main source
6629 file---the file specified as the input file for compilation.
6630 This macro is called only once, at the beginning of compilation.
6631
6632 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6633 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6634
6635 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY
6636 @item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6637 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6638 @var{stream} which indicates that the current directory during
6639 compilation is named @var{name}.
6640
6641 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6642 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6643
6644 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END
6645 @item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6646 A C statement to output DBX debugging information at the end of
6647 compilation of the main source file @var{name}.
6648
6649 If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output at the end
6650 of compilation, which is correct for most machines.
6651
6652 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
6653 @item DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6654 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6655 @var{stream} which indicates that file @var{name} is the current source
6656 file. This output is generated each time input shifts to a different
6657 source file as a result of @samp{#include}, the end of an included file,
6658 or a @samp{#line} command.
6659
6660 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6661 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6662 @end table
6663
6664 @need 2000
6665 @node SDB and DWARF
6666 @subsection Macros for SDB and DWARF Output
6667
6668 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6669 Here are macros for SDB and DWARF output.
6670
6671 @table @code
6672 @findex SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
6673 @item SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
6674 Define this macro if GNU CC should produce COFF-style debugging output
6675 for SDB in response to the @samp{-g} option.
6676
6677 @findex DWARF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6678 @item DWARF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6679 Define this macro if GNU CC should produce dwarf format debugging output
6680 in response to the @samp{-g} option.
6681
6682 @findex DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
6683 @item DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
6684 Define this macro if GNU CC should produce dwarf version 2 format
6685 debugging output in response to the @samp{-g} option.
6686
6687 To support optional call frame debugging information, you must also
6688 define @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either set
6689 @code{RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P} on the prologue insns if you use RTL for the
6690 prologue, or call @code{dwarf2out_def_cfa} and @code{dwarf2out_reg_save}
6691 as appropriate from @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} if you don't.
6692
6693 @findex LINKER_DOES_NOT_WORK_WITH_DWARF2
6694 @item LINKER_DOES_NOT_WORK_WITH_DWARF2
6695 Define this macro if the linker does not work with Dwarf version 2.
6696 Normally, if the user specifies only @samp{-ggdb} GNU CC will use Dwarf
6697 version 2 if available; this macro disables this. See the description
6698 of the @code{PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE} macro for more details.
6699
6700 @findex PUT_SDB_@dots{}
6701 @item PUT_SDB_@dots{}
6702 Define these macros to override the assembler syntax for the special
6703 SDB assembler directives. See @file{sdbout.c} for a list of these
6704 macros and their arguments. If the standard syntax is used, you need
6705 not define them yourself.
6706
6707 @findex SDB_DELIM
6708 @item SDB_DELIM
6709 Some assemblers do not support a semicolon as a delimiter, even between
6710 SDB assembler directives. In that case, define this macro to be the
6711 delimiter to use (usually @samp{\n}). It is not necessary to define
6712 a new set of @code{PUT_SDB_@var{op}} macros if this is the only change
6713 required.
6714
6715 @findex SDB_GENERATE_FAKE
6716 @item SDB_GENERATE_FAKE
6717 Define this macro to override the usual method of constructing a dummy
6718 name for anonymous structure and union types. See @file{sdbout.c} for
6719 more information.
6720
6721 @findex SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
6722 @item SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
6723 Define this macro to allow references to unknown structure,
6724 union, or enumeration tags to be emitted. Standard COFF does not
6725 allow handling of unknown references, MIPS ECOFF has support for
6726 it.
6727
6728 @findex SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
6729 @item SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
6730 Define this macro to allow references to structure, union, or
6731 enumeration tags that have not yet been seen to be handled. Some
6732 assemblers choke if forward tags are used, while some require it.
6733 @end table
6734
6735 @node Cross-compilation
6736 @section Cross Compilation and Floating Point
6737 @cindex cross compilation and floating point
6738 @cindex floating point and cross compilation
6739
6740 While all modern machines use 2's complement representation for integers,
6741 there are a variety of representations for floating point numbers. This
6742 means that in a cross-compiler the representation of floating point numbers
6743 in the compiled program may be different from that used in the machine
6744 doing the compilation.
6745
6746 @findex atof
6747 Because different representation systems may offer different amounts of
6748 range and precision, the cross compiler cannot safely use the host
6749 machine's floating point arithmetic. Therefore, floating point constants
6750 must be represented in the target machine's format. This means that the
6751 cross compiler cannot use @code{atof} to parse a floating point constant;
6752 it must have its own special routine to use instead. Also, constant
6753 folding must emulate the target machine's arithmetic (or must not be done
6754 at all).
6755
6756 The macros in the following table should be defined only if you are cross
6757 compiling between different floating point formats.
6758
6759 Otherwise, don't define them. Then default definitions will be set up which
6760 use @code{double} as the data type, @code{==} to test for equality, etc.
6761
6762 You don't need to worry about how many times you use an operand of any
6763 of these macros. The compiler never uses operands which have side effects.
6764
6765 @table @code
6766 @findex REAL_VALUE_TYPE
6767 @item REAL_VALUE_TYPE
6768 A macro for the C data type to be used to hold a floating point value
6769 in the target machine's format. Typically this would be a
6770 @code{struct} containing an array of @code{int}.
6771
6772 @findex REAL_VALUES_EQUAL
6773 @item REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (@var{x}, @var{y})
6774 A macro for a C expression which compares for equality the two values,
6775 @var{x} and @var{y}, both of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
6776
6777 @findex REAL_VALUES_LESS
6778 @item REAL_VALUES_LESS (@var{x}, @var{y})
6779 A macro for a C expression which tests whether @var{x} is less than
6780 @var{y}, both values being of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} and
6781 interpreted as floating point numbers in the target machine's
6782 representation.
6783
6784 @findex REAL_VALUE_LDEXP
6785 @findex ldexp
6786 @item REAL_VALUE_LDEXP (@var{x}, @var{scale})
6787 A macro for a C expression which performs the standard library
6788 function @code{ldexp}, but using the target machine's floating point
6789 representation. Both @var{x} and the value of the expression have
6790 type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}. The second argument, @var{scale}, is an
6791 integer.
6792
6793 @findex REAL_VALUE_FIX
6794 @item REAL_VALUE_FIX (@var{x})
6795 A macro whose definition is a C expression to convert the target-machine
6796 floating point value @var{x} to a signed integer. @var{x} has type
6797 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
6798
6799 @findex REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX
6800 @item REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (@var{x})
6801 A macro whose definition is a C expression to convert the target-machine
6802 floating point value @var{x} to an unsigned integer. @var{x} has type
6803 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
6804
6805 @findex REAL_VALUE_RNDZINT
6806 @item REAL_VALUE_RNDZINT (@var{x})
6807 A macro whose definition is a C expression to round the target-machine
6808 floating point value @var{x} towards zero to an integer value (but still
6809 as a floating point number). @var{x} has type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE},
6810 and so does the value.
6811
6812 @findex REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_RNDZINT
6813 @item REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_RNDZINT (@var{x})
6814 A macro whose definition is a C expression to round the target-machine
6815 floating point value @var{x} towards zero to an unsigned integer value
6816 (but still represented as a floating point number). @var{x} has type
6817 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, and so does the value.
6818
6819 @findex REAL_VALUE_ATOF
6820 @item REAL_VALUE_ATOF (@var{string}, @var{mode})
6821 A macro for a C expression which converts @var{string}, an expression of
6822 type @code{char *}, into a floating point number in the target machine's
6823 representation for mode @var{mode}. The value has type
6824 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
6825
6826 @findex REAL_INFINITY
6827 @item REAL_INFINITY
6828 Define this macro if infinity is a possible floating point value, and
6829 therefore division by 0 is legitimate.
6830
6831 @findex REAL_VALUE_ISINF
6832 @findex isinf
6833 @item REAL_VALUE_ISINF (@var{x})
6834 A macro for a C expression which determines whether @var{x}, a floating
6835 point value, is infinity. The value has type @code{int}.
6836 By default, this is defined to call @code{isinf}.
6837
6838 @findex REAL_VALUE_ISNAN
6839 @findex isnan
6840 @item REAL_VALUE_ISNAN (@var{x})
6841 A macro for a C expression which determines whether @var{x}, a floating
6842 point value, is a ``nan'' (not-a-number). The value has type
6843 @code{int}. By default, this is defined to call @code{isnan}.
6844 @end table
6845
6846 @cindex constant folding and floating point
6847 Define the following additional macros if you want to make floating
6848 point constant folding work while cross compiling. If you don't
6849 define them, cross compilation is still possible, but constant folding
6850 will not happen for floating point values.
6851
6852 @table @code
6853 @findex REAL_ARITHMETIC
6854 @item REAL_ARITHMETIC (@var{output}, @var{code}, @var{x}, @var{y})
6855 A macro for a C statement which calculates an arithmetic operation of
6856 the two floating point values @var{x} and @var{y}, both of type
6857 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} in the target machine's representation, to
6858 produce a result of the same type and representation which is stored
6859 in @var{output} (which will be a variable).
6860
6861 The operation to be performed is specified by @var{code}, a tree code
6862 which will always be one of the following: @code{PLUS_EXPR},
6863 @code{MINUS_EXPR}, @code{MULT_EXPR}, @code{RDIV_EXPR},
6864 @code{MAX_EXPR}, @code{MIN_EXPR}.@refill
6865
6866 @cindex overflow while constant folding
6867 The expansion of this macro is responsible for checking for overflow.
6868 If overflow happens, the macro expansion should execute the statement
6869 @code{return 0;}, which indicates the inability to perform the
6870 arithmetic operation requested.
6871
6872 @findex REAL_VALUE_NEGATE
6873 @item REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (@var{x})
6874 A macro for a C expression which returns the negative of the floating
6875 point value @var{x}. Both @var{x} and the value of the expression
6876 have type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} and are in the target machine's
6877 floating point representation.
6878
6879 There is no way for this macro to report overflow, since overflow
6880 can't happen in the negation operation.
6881
6882 @findex REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE
6883 @item REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (@var{mode}, @var{x})
6884 A macro for a C expression which converts the floating point value
6885 @var{x} to mode @var{mode}.
6886
6887 Both @var{x} and the value of the expression are in the target machine's
6888 floating point representation and have type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
6889 However, the value should have an appropriate bit pattern to be output
6890 properly as a floating constant whose precision accords with mode
6891 @var{mode}.
6892
6893 There is no way for this macro to report overflow.
6894
6895 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_INT
6896 @item REAL_VALUE_TO_INT (@var{low}, @var{high}, @var{x})
6897 A macro for a C expression which converts a floating point value
6898 @var{x} into a double-precision integer which is then stored into
6899 @var{low} and @var{high}, two variables of type @var{int}.
6900
6901 @item REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (@var{x}, @var{low}, @var{high}, @var{mode})
6902 @findex REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT
6903 A macro for a C expression which converts a double-precision integer
6904 found in @var{low} and @var{high}, two variables of type @var{int},
6905 into a floating point value which is then stored into @var{x}.
6906 The value is in the target machine's representation for mode @var{mode}
6907 and has the type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
6908 @end table
6909
6910 @node Misc
6911 @section Miscellaneous Parameters
6912 @cindex parameters, miscellaneous
6913
6914 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6915 Here are several miscellaneous parameters.
6916
6917 @table @code
6918 @item PREDICATE_CODES
6919 @findex PREDICATE_CODES
6920 Define this if you have defined special-purpose predicates in the file
6921 @file{@var{machine}.c}. This macro is called within an initializer of an
6922 array of structures. The first field in the structure is the name of a
6923 predicate and the second field is an array of rtl codes. For each
6924 predicate, list all rtl codes that can be in expressions matched by the
6925 predicate. The list should have a trailing comma. Here is an example
6926 of two entries in the list for a typical RISC machine:
6927
6928 @smallexample
6929 #define PREDICATE_CODES \
6930 @{"gen_reg_rtx_operand", @{SUBREG, REG@}@}, \
6931 @{"reg_or_short_cint_operand", @{SUBREG, REG, CONST_INT@}@},
6932 @end smallexample
6933
6934 Defining this macro does not affect the generated code (however,
6935 incorrect definitions that omit an rtl code that may be matched by the
6936 predicate can cause the compiler to malfunction). Instead, it allows
6937 the table built by @file{genrecog} to be more compact and efficient,
6938 thus speeding up the compiler. The most important predicates to include
6939 in the list specified by this macro are those used in the most insn
6940 patterns.
6941
6942 @findex CASE_VECTOR_MODE
6943 @item CASE_VECTOR_MODE
6944 An alias for a machine mode name. This is the machine mode that
6945 elements of a jump-table should have.
6946
6947 @findex CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE
6948 @item CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE (@var{min_offset}, @var{max_offset}, @var{body})
6949 Optional: return the preferred mode for an @code{addr_diff_vec}
6950 when the minimum and maximum offset are known. If you define this,
6951 it enables extra code in branch shortening to deal with @code{addr_diff_vec}.
6952 To make this work, you also have to define INSN_ALIGN and
6953 make the alignment for @code{addr_diff_vec} explicit.
6954 The @var{body} argument is provided so that teh offset_unsigned and scale
6955 flags can be updated.
6956
6957 @findex CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
6958 @item CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
6959 Define this macro to be a C expression to indicate when jump-tables
6960 should contain relative addresses. If jump-tables never contain
6961 relative addresses, then you need not define this macro.
6962
6963 @findex CASE_DROPS_THROUGH
6964 @item CASE_DROPS_THROUGH
6965 Define this if control falls through a @code{case} insn when the index
6966 value is out of range. This means the specified default-label is
6967 actually ignored by the @code{case} insn proper.
6968
6969 @findex CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
6970 @item CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
6971 Define this to be the smallest number of different values for which it
6972 is best to use a jump-table instead of a tree of conditional branches.
6973 The default is four for machines with a @code{casesi} instruction and
6974 five otherwise. This is best for most machines.
6975
6976 @findex WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
6977 @item WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
6978 Define this macro if operations between registers with integral mode
6979 smaller than a word are always performed on the entire register.
6980 Most RISC machines have this property and most CISC machines do not.
6981
6982 @findex LOAD_EXTEND_OP
6983 @item LOAD_EXTEND_OP (@var{mode})
6984 Define this macro to be a C expression indicating when insns that read
6985 memory in @var{mode}, an integral mode narrower than a word, set the
6986 bits outside of @var{mode} to be either the sign-extension or the
6987 zero-extension of the data read. Return @code{SIGN_EXTEND} for values
6988 of @var{mode} for which the
6989 insn sign-extends, @code{ZERO_EXTEND} for which it zero-extends, and
6990 @code{NIL} for other modes.
6991
6992 This macro is not called with @var{mode} non-integral or with a width
6993 greater than or equal to @code{BITS_PER_WORD}, so you may return any
6994 value in this case. Do not define this macro if it would always return
6995 @code{NIL}. On machines where this macro is defined, you will normally
6996 define it as the constant @code{SIGN_EXTEND} or @code{ZERO_EXTEND}.
6997
6998 @findex SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
6999 @item SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7000 Define this macro if loading short immediate values into registers sign
7001 extends.
7002
7003 @findex IMPLICIT_FIX_EXPR
7004 @item IMPLICIT_FIX_EXPR
7005 An alias for a tree code that should be used by default for conversion
7006 of floating point values to fixed point. Normally,
7007 @code{FIX_ROUND_EXPR} is used.@refill
7008
7009 @findex FIXUNS_TRUNC_LIKE_FIX_TRUNC
7010 @item FIXUNS_TRUNC_LIKE_FIX_TRUNC
7011 Define this macro if the same instructions that convert a floating
7012 point number to a signed fixed point number also convert validly to an
7013 unsigned one.
7014
7015 @findex EASY_DIV_EXPR
7016 @item EASY_DIV_EXPR
7017 An alias for a tree code that is the easiest kind of division to
7018 compile code for in the general case. It may be
7019 @code{TRUNC_DIV_EXPR}, @code{FLOOR_DIV_EXPR}, @code{CEIL_DIV_EXPR} or
7020 @code{ROUND_DIV_EXPR}. These four division operators differ in how
7021 they round the result to an integer. @code{EASY_DIV_EXPR} is used
7022 when it is permissible to use any of those kinds of division and the
7023 choice should be made on the basis of efficiency.@refill
7024
7025 @findex MOVE_MAX
7026 @item MOVE_MAX
7027 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7028 between memory and registers or between two memory locations.
7029
7030 @findex MAX_MOVE_MAX
7031 @item MAX_MOVE_MAX
7032 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7033 between memory and registers or between two memory locations. If this
7034 is undefined, the default is @code{MOVE_MAX}. Otherwise, it is the
7035 constant value that is the largest value that @code{MOVE_MAX} can have
7036 at run-time.
7037
7038 @findex SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7039 @item SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7040 A C expression that is nonzero if on this machine the number of bits
7041 actually used for the count of a shift operation is equal to the number
7042 of bits needed to represent the size of the object being shifted. When
7043 this macro is non-zero, the compiler will assume that it is safe to omit
7044 a sign-extend, zero-extend, and certain bitwise `and' instructions that
7045 truncates the count of a shift operation. On machines that have
7046 instructions that act on bitfields at variable positions, which may
7047 include `bit test' instructions, a nonzero @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}
7048 also enables deletion of truncations of the values that serve as
7049 arguments to bitfield instructions.
7050
7051 If both types of instructions truncate the count (for shifts) and
7052 position (for bitfield operations), or if no variable-position bitfield
7053 instructions exist, you should define this macro.
7054
7055 However, on some machines, such as the 80386 and the 680x0, truncation
7056 only applies to shift operations and not the (real or pretended)
7057 bitfield operations. Define @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED} to be zero on
7058 such machines. Instead, add patterns to the @file{md} file that include
7059 the implied truncation of the shift instructions.
7060
7061 You need not define this macro if it would always have the value of zero.
7062
7063 @findex TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION
7064 @item TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (@var{outprec}, @var{inprec})
7065 A C expression which is nonzero if on this machine it is safe to
7066 ``convert'' an integer of @var{inprec} bits to one of @var{outprec}
7067 bits (where @var{outprec} is smaller than @var{inprec}) by merely
7068 operating on it as if it had only @var{outprec} bits.
7069
7070 On many machines, this expression can be 1.
7071
7072 @c rearranged this, removed the phrase "it is reported that". this was
7073 @c to fix an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
7074 When @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} returns 1 for a pair of sizes for
7075 modes for which @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P} is 0, suboptimal code can result.
7076 If this is the case, making @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} return 0 in
7077 such cases may improve things.
7078
7079 @findex STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7080 @item STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7081 A C expression describing the value returned by a comparison operator
7082 with an integral mode and stored by a store-flag instruction
7083 (@samp{s@var{cond}}) when the condition is true. This description must
7084 apply to @emph{all} the @samp{s@var{cond}} patterns and all the
7085 comparison operators whose results have a @code{MODE_INT} mode.
7086
7087 A value of 1 or -1 means that the instruction implementing the
7088 comparison operator returns exactly 1 or -1 when the comparison is true
7089 and 0 when the comparison is false. Otherwise, the value indicates
7090 which bits of the result are guaranteed to be 1 when the comparison is
7091 true. This value is interpreted in the mode of the comparison
7092 operation, which is given by the mode of the first operand in the
7093 @samp{s@var{cond}} pattern. Either the low bit or the sign bit of
7094 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} be on. Presently, only those bits are used by
7095 the compiler.
7096
7097 If @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is neither 1 or -1, the compiler will
7098 generate code that depends only on the specified bits. It can also
7099 replace comparison operators with equivalent operations if they cause
7100 the required bits to be set, even if the remaining bits are undefined.
7101 For example, on a machine whose comparison operators return an
7102 @code{SImode} value and where @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is defined as
7103 @samp{0x80000000}, saying that just the sign bit is relevant, the
7104 expression
7105
7106 @smallexample
7107 (ne:SI (and:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{power-of-2})) (const_int 0))
7108 @end smallexample
7109
7110 @noindent
7111 can be converted to
7112
7113 @smallexample
7114 (ashift:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))
7115 @end smallexample
7116
7117 @noindent
7118 where @var{n} is the appropriate shift count to move the bit being
7119 tested into the sign bit.
7120
7121 There is no way to describe a machine that always sets the low-order bit
7122 for a true value, but does not guarantee the value of any other bits,
7123 but we do not know of any machine that has such an instruction. If you
7124 are trying to port GNU CC to such a machine, include an instruction to
7125 perform a logical-and of the result with 1 in the pattern for the
7126 comparison operators and let us know
7127 @ifset USING
7128 (@pxref{Bug Reporting,,How to Report Bugs}).
7129 @end ifset
7130 @ifclear USING
7131 (@pxref{Bug Reporting,,How to Report Bugs,gcc.info,Using GCC}).
7132 @end ifclear
7133
7134 Often, a machine will have multiple instructions that obtain a value
7135 from a comparison (or the condition codes). Here are rules to guide the
7136 choice of value for @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}, and hence the instructions
7137 to be used:
7138
7139 @itemize @bullet
7140 @item
7141 Use the shortest sequence that yields a valid definition for
7142 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}. It is more efficient for the compiler to
7143 ``normalize'' the value (convert it to, e.g., 1 or 0) than for the
7144 comparison operators to do so because there may be opportunities to
7145 combine the normalization with other operations.
7146
7147 @item
7148 For equal-length sequences, use a value of 1 or -1, with -1 being
7149 slightly preferred on machines with expensive jumps and 1 preferred on
7150 other machines.
7151
7152 @item
7153 As a second choice, choose a value of @samp{0x80000001} if instructions
7154 exist that set both the sign and low-order bits but do not define the
7155 others.
7156
7157 @item
7158 Otherwise, use a value of @samp{0x80000000}.
7159 @end itemize
7160
7161 Many machines can produce both the value chosen for
7162 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} and its negation in the same number of
7163 instructions. On those machines, you should also define a pattern for
7164 those cases, e.g., one matching
7165
7166 @smallexample
7167 (set @var{A} (neg:@var{m} (ne:@var{m} @var{B} @var{C})))
7168 @end smallexample
7169
7170 Some machines can also perform @code{and} or @code{plus} operations on
7171 condition code values with less instructions than the corresponding
7172 @samp{s@var{cond}} insn followed by @code{and} or @code{plus}. On those
7173 machines, define the appropriate patterns. Use the names @code{incscc}
7174 and @code{decscc}, respectively, for the patterns which perform
7175 @code{plus} or @code{minus} operations on condition code values. See
7176 @file{rs6000.md} for some examples. The GNU Superoptizer can be used to
7177 find such instruction sequences on other machines.
7178
7179 You need not define @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} if the machine has no store-flag
7180 instructions.
7181
7182 @findex FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7183 @item FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7184 A C expression that gives a non-zero floating point value that is
7185 returned when comparison operators with floating-point results are true.
7186 Define this macro on machine that have comparison operations that return
7187 floating-point values. If there are no such operations, do not define
7188 this macro.
7189
7190 @findex Pmode
7191 @item Pmode
7192 An alias for the machine mode for pointers. On most machines, define
7193 this to be the integer mode corresponding to the width of a hardware
7194 pointer; @code{SImode} on 32-bit machine or @code{DImode} on 64-bit machines.
7195 On some machines you must define this to be one of the partial integer
7196 modes, such as @code{PSImode}.
7197
7198 The width of @code{Pmode} must be at least as large as the value of
7199 @code{POINTER_SIZE}. If it is not equal, you must define the macro
7200 @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED} to specify how pointers are extended
7201 to @code{Pmode}.
7202
7203 @findex FUNCTION_MODE
7204 @item FUNCTION_MODE
7205 An alias for the machine mode used for memory references to functions
7206 being called, in @code{call} RTL expressions. On most machines this
7207 should be @code{QImode}.
7208
7209 @findex INTEGRATE_THRESHOLD
7210 @item INTEGRATE_THRESHOLD (@var{decl})
7211 A C expression for the maximum number of instructions above which the
7212 function @var{decl} should not be inlined. @var{decl} is a
7213 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} node.
7214
7215 The default definition of this macro is 64 plus 8 times the number of
7216 arguments that the function accepts. Some people think a larger
7217 threshold should be used on RISC machines.
7218
7219 @findex SCCS_DIRECTIVE
7220 @item SCCS_DIRECTIVE
7221 Define this if the preprocessor should ignore @code{#sccs} directives
7222 and print no error message.
7223
7224 @findex NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7225 @item NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7226 Define this macro if the system header files support C++ as well as C.
7227 This macro inhibits the usual method of using system header files in
7228 C++, which is to pretend that the file's contents are enclosed in
7229 @samp{extern "C" @{@dots{}@}}.
7230
7231 @findex HANDLE_PRAGMA
7232 @findex #pragma
7233 @findex pragma
7234 @item HANDLE_PRAGMA (@var{stream}, @var{node})
7235 Define this macro if you want to implement any pragmas. If defined, it
7236 is a C expression whose value is 1 if the pragma was handled by the function.
7237 The argument @var{stream} is the stdio input stream from which the source text
7238 can be read. @var{node} is the tree node for the identifier after the
7239 @code{#pragma}.
7240
7241 It is generally a bad idea to implement new uses of @code{#pragma}. The
7242 only reason to define this macro is for compatibility with other
7243 compilers that do support @code{#pragma} for the sake of any user
7244 programs which already use it.
7245
7246 @findex VALID_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTE
7247 @item VALID_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTE (@var{decl}, @var{attributes}, @var{identifier}, @var{args})
7248 If defined, a C expression whose value is nonzero if @var{identifier} with
7249 arguments @var{args} is a valid machine specific attribute for @var{decl}.
7250 The attributes in @var{attributes} have previously been assigned to @var{decl}.
7251
7252 @findex VALID_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTE
7253 @item VALID_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTE (@var{type}, @var{attributes}, @var{identifier}, @var{args})
7254 If defined, a C expression whose value is nonzero if @var{identifier} with
7255 arguments @var{args} is a valid machine specific attribute for @var{type}.
7256 The attributes in @var{attributes} have previously been assigned to @var{type}.
7257
7258 @findex COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7259 @item COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (@var{type1}, @var{type2})
7260 If defined, a C expression whose value is zero if the attributes on
7261 @var{type1} and @var{type2} are incompatible, one if they are compatible,
7262 and two if they are nearly compatible (which causes a warning to be
7263 generated).
7264
7265 @findex SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7266 @item SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (@var{type})
7267 If defined, a C statement that assigns default attributes to
7268 newly defined @var{type}.
7269
7270 @findex MERGE_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7271 @item MERGE_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (@var{type1}, @var{type2})
7272 Define this macro if the merging of type attributes needs special handling.
7273 If defined, the result is a list of the combined TYPE_ATTRIBUTES of
7274 @var{type1} and @var{type2}. It is assumed that comptypes has already been
7275 called and returned 1.
7276
7277 @findex MERGE_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7278 @item MERGE_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES (@var{olddecl}, @var{newdecl})
7279 Define this macro if the merging of decl attributes needs special handling.
7280 If defined, the result is a list of the combined DECL_MACHINE_ATTRIBUTES of
7281 @var{olddecl} and @var{newdecl}. @var{newdecl} is a duplicate declaration
7282 of @var{olddecl}. Examples of when this is needed are when one attribute
7283 overrides another, or when an attribute is nullified by a subsequent
7284 definition.
7285
7286 @findex DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7287 @item DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7288 Define this macro to control use of the character @samp{$} in identifier
7289 names. 0 means @samp{$} is not allowed by default; 1 means it is allowed.
7290 1 is the default; there is no need to define this macro in that case.
7291 This macro controls the compiler proper; it does not affect the preprocessor.
7292
7293 @findex NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
7294 @item NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
7295 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
7296 @samp{$} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in
7297 G++ have @samp{$} in the identifiers. If this macro is defined,
7298 @samp{.} is used instead.
7299
7300 @findex NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
7301 @item NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
7302 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
7303 @samp{.} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in G++
7304 have names that use @samp{.}. If this macro is defined, these names
7305 are rewritten to avoid @samp{.}.
7306
7307 @findex DEFAULT_MAIN_RETURN
7308 @item DEFAULT_MAIN_RETURN
7309 Define this macro if the target system expects every program's @code{main}
7310 function to return a standard ``success'' value by default (if no other
7311 value is explicitly returned).
7312
7313 The definition should be a C statement (sans semicolon) to generate the
7314 appropriate rtl instructions. It is used only when compiling the end of
7315 @code{main}.
7316
7317 @item HAVE_ATEXIT
7318 @findex HAVE_ATEXIT
7319 Define this if the target system supports the function
7320 @code{atexit} from the ANSI C standard. If this is not defined,
7321 and @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} is not defined, a default
7322 @code{exit} function will be provided to support C++.
7323
7324 @item EXIT_BODY
7325 @findex EXIT_BODY
7326 Define this if your @code{exit} function needs to do something
7327 besides calling an external function @code{_cleanup} before
7328 terminating with @code{_exit}. The @code{EXIT_BODY} macro is
7329 only needed if neither @code{HAVE_ATEXIT} nor
7330 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} are defined.
7331
7332 @findex INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED
7333 @item INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7334 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7335 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7336 even if they appear to use a resource set or clobbered in @var{insn}.
7337 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}; GNU CC knows that
7338 every @code{call_insn} has this behavior. On machines where some @code{insn}
7339 or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and hence has this behavior,
7340 you should define this macro.
7341
7342 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7343
7344 @findex INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED
7345 @item INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7346 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7347 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7348 even if they appear to set or clobber a resource referenced in @var{insn}.
7349 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}. On machines where
7350 some @code{insn} or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and its operands
7351 are registers whose use is actually in the subroutine it calls, you should
7352 define this macro. Doing so allows the delay slot scheduler to move
7353 instructions which copy arguments into the argument registers into the delay
7354 slot of @var{insn}.
7355
7356 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7357
7358 @findex MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG
7359 @item MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG (@var{insn})
7360 In rare cases, correct code generation requires extra machine
7361 dependent processing between the second jump optimization pass and
7362 delayed branch scheduling. On those machines, define this macro as a C
7363 statement to act on the code starting at @var{insn}.
7364
7365 @findex MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7366 @item MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7367 Define this macro if in some cases global symbols from one translation
7368 unit may not be bound to undefined symbols in another translation unit
7369 without user intervention. For instance, under Microsoft Windows
7370 symbols must be explicitly imported from shared libraries (DLLs).
7371
7372 @findex GIV_SORT_CRITERION
7373 @item GIV_SORT_CRITERION (@var{giv1}, @var{giv2})
7374 In some cases, the strength reduction optimization pass can produce better
7375 code if this is defined. This macro controls the order that induction
7376 variables are combined. This macro is particularly useful if the target has
7377 limited addressing modes. For instance, the SH target has only positive
7378 offsets in addresses. Thus sorting to put the smallest address first
7379 allows the most combinations to be found.
7380
7381 @findex ISSUE_RATE
7382 @item ISSUE_RATE
7383 A C expression that returns how many instructions can be issued at the
7384 same time if the machine is a superscalar machine. This is only used by
7385 the @samp{Haifa} scheduler, and not the traditional scheduler.
7386
7387 @end table